(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Honored guest : for singing schools, singing conventions, etc."

For Heaven I'm Bound 



Fay Waliington 



L. C. Higdon 



'&&Jm£mmmE&Ui£m 



£35 



r 



1* 



* 



1. My bur -dens are light -er, sun-shine is bright-er, When to my Lord I 

2. Tneshad-owa that hin-dered,vrhen I eur-ren-dered, Left me and fled a- 

3. No long-er I'm doubting, glo - ry I'm shooting, He is my hope and 




fobftftfet ; 




1 



g p m * —\- * * L < *— jt— j-i *j— ~ J j JE . C Jt 5 * ~ 



rf=ff 



1F£=Z 



pray , when I pray; My path-way is clear -er,heav-en is near- er, As I go 
way, fled a -way; And now I'm re-joic-ing,prais-es I'mvoic-ing, Un-to my 
stay, hope and stay; To beav- en I'm go-ing,hap-py inknow-ing I shall be 



,^^^N^Ife^^lfe% 



Fine. Chorus 



D.S.— Whilea-ges up 




on my way, on my way.Forheav-en I'm bound, where 

Lord each day, Lord each day. For heav- en Pm bound, 

there lomt day, there some day. 



it aay,tnei 

;• H 

PT~Ht: 



1 



i g ^==i^g^y^ ^ 



there shall roll, there shall roll. 



Ft— r-p — 5 s c * — T-Ftrf" 1 



I shall be crowned with glo -ry up-onmy8oul; 

where I shall be crowned on my soul; 

* ♦ J) J. I 

3t 



=F^= 



T- 



*=t 



stf^i^iiti 



"~f U" 



r; 






Then I shall be glad, 



Then I shall be glad, 



rr; 

andnev-er be sad, 




and nev-er be sad, 

JL 



Copjrrlaht. lM5.br JnwD, V»u«hun. MoiU Publisher. Id ■UliaBful ShowVTo" 



p^iggES 




.— * 



Honored Guest 

FOR 

Singing- Schools, Singing- Conventions, Etc. 

AUTHORS 
G. Kieffer Vaug-han Adger M. Pace W. B. Walbert 



Chas. W. Vaughan 
Jesse B. Hardin 
L. O. Brock 
Byron Faust 
Minzo C. Jones 
J. C. Cooper 
T. M. Stevens 
M. B. Hooton 
W. H. Nelson 
Vol Sumrall 
Malcom Jones 
G. D. McNair 
Curtis Taylor 
A. Curtis 
M. V. Moore 
Wesley Tucker 
Fred Rich 
Betty Henson 
Geo. W. Rambo 
J. D. Patrick 
C. N. Oden 
John Taylor 
L. E. Butrum 
K. D. Henson 



Marion W. Easterlinj 
J. E. Marsh 

B. F. White 
Barber E,dwards 
J. W. Vaughan 
L. C. Higdon 

A. O. Hargett 
Dr H. H. Martin 
R. G. Wilkins 
Ernest N. Edwards 
U. S. Lindsey 
Harvey A. Lewis 
J. Monroe Mobbs 
Harkins Frye 
Elton Spears 
Walter C. Carter 
G. A. Phillips 
H. R. Sharpe 

C. L. Hamilton 
T. Mosie Lister 
Jesse R. Varner 
David C. Wray 
H. H. McDonald 
Rev. Harry O. Kuts 



James D. Walbert 
Austin Williams 
M. D. McWhorter 
Rev. Rupert Cravens 
Houston L. Thomas 
Mrs. Jesse B. Hardin 
J. Porter Thomason 
Will L. Matthews 
William R. Wallace 
Lawson Walker 
Durwood T. Collins 
Bryant Johnson 
Mrs. Mabel Gibbons 
Mrs. D. E. McGuire 
J. B. Troublefield 
Mrs. H. G. Gillock 
Willie Willmurth 
J. Noble Moore 
J. O. Townsend 
Richard E. Powers 
Vernon McReynolds 
Wyatt J. Smith 
W. Earl Grant 
Rev. Morris G. Lee 



n 



i' 

!■•■ i 
I 

I* 

i/1 




PRICES: I 

35 Cents a Copy; $3.60 a Dozen; $13,00 for 50; $25.00 a 100, postpaid! 
anywhere in the U.S.A. Shaped Notes Only. Manila Binding. 

JAMES D. VAUGHAN, MUSIC PUBLISHER I 

LAWRENCEBURG, TENNESSEE I 



Copyright, 1945, by James D. Vaughan, Music Publisher 



When We Look on His Face 

Herbert BufTum G. KiefferVaugha* 



gE 



it 



* i H 



:#H=3=t£: 



± 



-S*- 



* 



»J 



1. When we walk with the Sav - iour, He is of - ten so near We can 

2. Just to think we shall real- ly see our Sav -iour some day, And His 

3. When the mil -lions shall gath-er there, to look on His face, In that 



Pfr 



5= 



=£ 



-i^i-ifc- 



=?=£ 



_b_j &_iM CV4 



;a 



iLj*. 



*=£ 



£* 



3===^ 



"[jh — * — ^ : 



'» v 



t=& 



§g 



tell Him each burden, each care, each care: Then His joy floods our spir-its with such 
glo - ry for - ev - er to share, to share; Where no strom-cloud shall gather, there, to 
won-der-ful coun-try so fair, so fair; Hal-le - lu-jahswiil rise for - ev - er, 



EE 



*=£= 



^ : 



-v- 



:;: 



£= 



M£m 



% 



=P3 



&— u^ p> p- 



£ 



4 — n 



Fine. 



-A ."* 



:t £ 



£ 



± 



=^# 



5= 



¥=£ 



ful-ness, we say, 

trou-ble the soul, Oh, what must it be to see Him , o - ver there? 

praise to His name, 



_l : f ■ ■— 'm- 



stfeEi 



-• ■ P* a — a » M 



£=P=£ 



f f 



UHORUS. 




h h 


r> i r> 






— ■*• ' j 




/ib *^ 


A 


^ A— 4- 


-? — ? — 3— 


to) » 


-P ■ ■-» : 


i • '■ « « 


« • « 


When we look on His face in that home o-ver there, And His glc - ry for - 


^■V I 




i & 




[(•J., J v. 




— >. L » 


1 ! Li 


MV * 




rV » 1 , 








1 L_^_ 





i 



D.S. 



3t=3t 



3» 



^ 



ev - er to share, to share, If 'tis heav-en down here with the Lord by our Bide, 

. » -^ — ^ — s 



| E ^,—1 ^ 



5=t 



CT g r r r D 



=5=¥ 



COPYRIGHT, 1039, O. KEE5TEB VAUGBAU. OWCTSBi 



No. 1. 

J.N.M. 



When We All Get There 



J.Noble Moore 




1.0a some morn-ing erelong, we will join Ilea? -en's throng, In the cit - y so 

2. On that beau- ti -fal shore, we will sor-row no more, But with pleasure so 

3. Let us watch then,ahd pray for that home • com • ing day, That the joy of it 

+ Jft A gv a h r> . . ■ h . . -Jl -* "5 -* 

-E4-M — t^-M& ===ro=E= ^=b=:b=£q^ 



4E£ 



«# 1 ^ — M- 

|t 1 B «— 



fe=F=1==N=^=P^=J=;^=^=^ 



^=h 



T I M — JH t w * — «- 



brightand so fairjWe'U be hap-py and free with 

rich and so rare, We will sing of the love of 

all we may share; And to - geth - er may sing of 



_ S L_. 



(2^ 



:|i=5i=|£=i:= 



„ti N h, $ F^'e Chorus. k 
fffl a— -^4—2- — 2 — 2 — * — a — j— F^r-f -h 1— 



Iq that cit - y when we all get there. When we 
5: a. .#. a. . fc .« ^ P 

■fc- h-» — • — • ■ — • — M^-h-h hH 



1rl7 



±=&=|=$=1:=&=£ 



— '~ r * — * — * m - 

our loved ones to be, 
our Sav-iour a - bove» 
our heav-en - ly King. 

t p— p— ^— p— ' — ■ 

all get 

get o -ver there, 



=1 



-e 1 — 



^ 



o - ver there, 
when we all get o 






— I # — a— c 






P 



ver there, 



Heav-en'sglo - ries for - ev - er to share; 



#B 



_*. .*_ .^. .* . k . k. _*. . 

_■ tf 1 ( h ^ L^ 1 












— ^P — .,-Ts! *- : 






=fe 



Z).S. 



Vv.y h i—l"* — * — * — * — * — a ~ *-| — * — *- 

•j » » p p p p~T - "p p 

We will sing and shout His praise 

and shout Ilis praise, we will sing and 



=fc 







-4 A A •P 

In that 
shout His praise, 



?=£=-: -=p=p: 
— P— r- 



Gopyright, 1945. by James D, Vaazhan. Ma 



"Honored Gaest. 



No. 2. My Soul Is Overflowing With Joy 

Rev. Dr. Alfred Barratt J. W. Vaughan 



&-N 




1. My heart is no long-er o'er -burdened with care, For Je-sus has promised my 

2. Each moment He watches and cares for His own, When pathways are drear- y I'm 

3. The joy of sal- va-tion I'm shar-ing to-day, I'm trusting in Je-sus, His 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A^- -A- -A- -A- m -*• 






-it— p — f — 17— tP- c t? — P— t?— : F — t^ c tP — t^ — t? — t? 



*=* 



=£z=b=bd 



-^ — h- 









bur-dens to bear ; With wonder - ful glad-nessHis goodntess I share, 
nev - er a -lone; For Je - sus has made me an heir to His throne, My 
Word I o - bey; Mytrib-ute of love at His footstool I lay, 






tr- b— h— h- L p— h— h— r 



^ & ^ ^ IS _h j^ J Ch0RUS ' _n . 



i — ^~ 



♦-!- ^_I-^_LJS_ 



^ = -|=^m=J=-: 



soul is o'erflow-ing with joy. 



-a- -a- -a- -*- is is 



•- — # g- 



My soul is o'erflow-ing with joy, 

won-der-ful joy. 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

| |_^ — | 1 1 1 r i__ 

H — hk-— k — k — k — k — k— M— 



^^N -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- m -*- 

pz=gz F b= P bz=:^=^=:^=^=L=p^=^=r= 



-^-JJU^tf^ 



mi — ( — L #i — — — — — l # — — a — U0- 1- 1 j a— 

gL^-t — _ . t t ._ t ._ ff ^_ f ._q_K_t # ,_ # __ <> — sz 

My soul is o,er-flow-ing with joy; There's noth-ing to fear 

mar- vel -ous joy; 



-A- -A- -A- 

S=l-rt=t=b 



=^=^i-_z|a: 



m 



?-ir 






far V N~hh P 



F-p— f— P" 



it 



; #^H 










- - y p p 

for I'm bub -bling with |cheer, My soul is o'er-flow-ing with joy. 

^. .*. . A i. .*. -*- .*. |\ JN 



^ 



ii 






:t!=|=p==p=U=&: 



Copyrieht. 1945 by Jam»B D. Vaaghan. Music Publisher. i n " Honored Guest. 



f^i 



No. 3. 



Rev. Dr. Alfred Barratt 



Shining in Your Soul. 



Adger M.Pace. 



i^Sirs^sepuii 



i> TV 

l.Are yon lone and weary. burdened with your sin, Let the lov - ing Sav-ionr 
2. Put yourtrust in Je-sus,cast your doubts aside. On life's lone - ly path-way 
3. Cease yonr sad re-pin-ing, tread the nar-row road, With the lov - ing Sav-iour, 
4. Trust in Him completely, for His word is sure, He will nev - er leave you 

... 1\ -9- -■- 

-A- .A. -A. -A. |9- -m- Uj -•- -I— .(_ 

1 1 0- r — •— (5?— r-S »— H=#— » » »- 

-£?" ™ 9 ^- — kl — hs S-&tf^ m Is — Isr-Hs — Is — * — P" — ^-- 

— *— J— g-«— ^i«==3— f— p= c f-^— p— tj 

come and dwell with-in; Give Him full pos -ses -sion let Him take con-trol, 
let Him be yourGuide:Nev-er be dis-cour-aged when the bil-lows roll, 
He will bear your load;Tell Him all yourtrou -bfes, let Him make you whole, 
If your heart is pure;Till you reach thepor-tals of that shin-ing goal, 



W 



tt 



A- 



A- 
(=£ 

A A- 



•- -»- -A- -A- -A. -A- -A. A. 

'-^ 1 1 |k !£s — hA A -A A A A ^A A F h 






Chorus. 




S= 



£=:*= 



£ 



?Et 



■ft — ft— -ft— 



*nt 



^z^zt^ 



_ 4— I- 
-te— 



=1 



-A- 

:*z=g=:t2-tzz: 



-_,. r -fr h h _e 



-R- 



:*=a 



:*=*= 



lag 



8^ 



He will keep the lovelight shininginyour soul. LoYelight,lorelight, shin-ing in your 

Love - light, 

-B- -9- K II I J 

>- i — i— fs j -f- -A- 

|— — • ~0—G>- T 4 — - r * # » #- 

=^fr=zf==Etczft=tc=tt: 



T A -A- 



:t2=t2=t2=^= 



fe 



# 



-4-4 



— ' — r- i 

— « — I- 



r- 



-I 1 ™ — ■ — 7&\-d — a/- — K-a|-bB W j j — 



soul, LoTelight, lovelight, shining in your souI;Take the Sav-ionr as your Friend, 

soul, 'tis shin-ing, Love - light, 
i 

JL '- -,. -A- -*- -A A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

tzztrct=t=zt={~t=f=l=: 

A — eSs-r-A — A — A — A — A — A— A— 




^P=P=^=t=:tp=p--p=P=p=^ 



k— a-ts 35-A-p 8 _ 



v-z 






— I — H 1* 

on Hislove and grace depend, He will keep the lovelight, shining in your eoul 
.a- -a. -a. : A£-AQj£_ -g. f: :j?: _& 



7-i • — # — #--i P — P — P-rt — t — t b — • — P^-r» • P * ^~n 



Copsriyht. 1945. by James D. VaaghaD, Moaic PobHaher, Id "Honored GoeBt." 



-' 



No. 4. 

Rev.R.C. 



A Happy Day Is Coming 



Rev. Rupert Cravens 

15: 




l.A bright-er, bliss -ful day is just a - head, is just a-head, 'For those who 
2. The res - ur - rec-tion morn will bring sweet peace,will bring sweet peace, The faith- ful 
3. Oh won't you come a -long while Je - sus calls, while Je-sus calls, Accept Him 

-»*- -0- -0- -0- -0- w n n -j -d -0- 

-A * — r l —I r-r 1 1 ^ [-♦ * — - * ♦ 1 — ,»- 

-4 A — HA^ — A A-— A 1 1 h— A A A A- 



3E?i 



i=El=PEtg=|=E=^=S=SEfe 



£= 






-ft 



*=^=3 



5=fc£N: 



-e*- 



f 



t? P p 



t?— r 



i|czfc 



pil 



love the Lord. the living Bread,the liv - ing Bread; He bids us fol - low on and Ioto Him 

toil- ing saints will give re -lease; will give re- lease; We'll meet a - gain, with friends of long a- 

e'er the night of darkness falls, of dark - ness falls;He wants yon in His fold of peace and 

f\ AAA -A- A. -A- 

.- £: £ it p- -*■ -•- -#--t^t 

1 1 1 1 r l 1 H — I — 

1 4 A A— r-A-=— A A-— A- 

D.S. We'll praise the lamb of God forsin-ners 

Fine 



r\ N 







=F* 5 =*F3 



*=± 



mte*m£* 



=t 



■jsa: 



u ^ u u _ u? ; ?tt 

still, and love him still, That we a crown may gain may gain on Zi-on's Hill, on Zi -on's Hill- 
go, of long a -go, No more to see the tears, the tears of earth be -low of earth below, 
love, of peace and love, And in a man-sion bright,so bright in heav'n above.in heav'na-boie. 

A. ^ ..,. .A. -A. -A- ^ tt _ h h JS Nh 

^~p— £— rS-*-* — 3 — — ♦- 



-T- 

F. — A 



:{r_t 

-A- 



-t-_t-_ t— t: 



-A— I- 



?^=pz=^=^=p=p=p-pzta = ^ = ^ = ^=p-^- F :-^ 



k — A — k — u - 

<— h— "— .■- 



tr-tr 



t **=HPFP^ 



^ 



slain, for sin - ners, slain, At home in glo - ry bright,so bright we shall re-main,we shall remak. 
Chorus. 




0- -0- 

Oh what a hap - py day 



ilad day when we get home, when we get home. 




■•■ k v l l) D V D D 

With palms of vie - to - ry and shoutsthe saints will come, will glad-ly come; 



_f _ r t_f— t 



A- -A- 



N - ■*■ 



,— A A A — r-A- A A- A A— A -T " — — ~ 



Coj>rri(rhtl<Mr>. by Ja 



D. V.uchati Mualc Pablieher in "Honored Guest. 



No. 5. 

W.B.W. 



Living in the Sunlight 



W.B.Walbert 



±: 






5« 



l.Liv - ing in the sun -light of the Sav-iour's smile. Sing-ing,shout-ing gU-ry, 
2. Go- ing home to glo - ry, trust- ing in His love, Tell- ing out the st»-rj 
3.Hea-ven's grow - ing near-er, just a- cross the way, In the Ho • lj Cit-y, 

«- -k- -k- -k ^ . . -*--*- 






=*-* * * * » *-Cu C k h— *=- 






^H=^=F 



y g^- -^- -^- -^- • gk- -J- ^ -J- ^ # - a >- -®- 



hap - py all the while; Tell - ing out the sto - ry to the souls a -stray, 
of the heav'nly Dove; In His love con-fid -ing,know-ing He is mine, 
land of per - feet day; Soon I'll join the sing-ing in that hap-py clime, 

-P- -k- -k k- 

-t=pt 



h^ees 



ts»- 



[) P p p P 



m-m F # W j [ p=h 





-A 1 H i \- — A — A-P 

Chorus. 

— * — ^— ^ — p— D — P *h 



-p — p — p" 

Liv-ing in the sun-light ev- 'ry pass-ing day. 

Constant-ly a - bid -ing, hap - py all the time. Liv -ing in the sunlight 

Where the bells are ring- ing out the glo-ry chime. 



f%==$ = ^^ F »_ f— »-- p— 1=qz- T -f>-^ =^=^=q. 

^--5— — a — Jt iHr-E H; P ^gi— F: 4— 1— r 



-g- v p. v 1? * ^--^- * 4 fip 

of the Sav-iour's smile, Hap-py in His serv-ice, sing-ing all the while; 



£=$=>'=£=: 



— p — p — p — p — p- 11 — 



zfr -D-fr-fc 



. 1 Iris h h — g^— y»— p— »— n— 1 — pc 



P P P P 

he snn-Iight ev -'ry pass-ing day. 
k- P- A -k- A - ■#■ 



With His hand to guide me, I shall nev-er stray, Li? - ing. in 

eEE=t=t=t=E=tztt=t = fe = k = t= :p=p=p=p^t:=t=Eg= 

it— a * -a— it— *- c b— h— b— h— ^- c ■ — ^-LP^ 1 

ppppl I ^ k ^ ^ 



zH- 



^p=p=p=p 



Copyright. 1945, by James D. Vaaghan. Mceic Pnbliehe 



i "Honored Gnest. 1 



No. 6. That Will Be Heaven For Me 

Rev. G. C. Morris William R. Wallace 






1. The Saviour has promised to go and pre-pare A won-der-ful dwelling place, 

2. With friends and with loved ones,notv gone on be- fore, Some day I shall liveon that 

3. I want to beread- y when Je -sus shall call, I want to have sheaves for Him, 



, n A -rAr — A A * A *~H 1 * A =— r »T B •> ■ A 



prrt 



u 



P=P=P=^=t3=tb==^=t2=t3I 



ifcz- 



-N 



•H 1 — r-*H 1 K-r— I 1 

-• — « — >h — — •— L •- — « 



ru^. 



±=£ 



yon -dersomewhere;SometimeHe is com-ing to take me up there ,0 
beau-ti-ful shore;I know I'll be hap -py with them ev - er -more, And 
tho' I am small; I want to live with"Him,who now is my all, And 
IN >- -^ 

A 5 F m b — r *~ — * * * * * — rl 1 * * * — i 



Chorus. 






that will be heav-en for me. 



that will be heaven for me, 

be heav -en 



for me, 



*-— • — * — m — * n — ^ — rm-rm-7-m — *> — m~ * — m — r* * * *^ 



U=ZU=P=t|5ZI^Et2=Et3=b=t2=t2=t2=t2=t^ ^ 



tesfa jgfefef^^E 



3t 






• • — L #- 



• 0- 

l> P 

Yes, that will be heav-en for me; Where mil- lions are sing -ing, 

sweetheav-en for me; 
r\ -♦- -#- -#- Pv _ _ _ 

*— r i*^— * — * — a — S- — r— r » S — -A — . a — r *^ — * — * * 

FT \> \) b 



and glo-ry bells ring-ing, that will be heav-en 

-♦•7 -♦- -♦- •♦- N 

* — HA- — it 1* A A A — r *- — * * m ,*" 

Cooyricht. 1945, by Junes O. Vauichan, Music Publisher, in "Honored Goeot. 



i2=t2= 



for me. 



No. 11. When the Sun Fades Away 

W. W. Willie Willmurth 



M*^ 






fr ^ rbl ' 



3R 



-1 d — d— j— 3 

— -^r — ; t — ^ — -4 



1. When the sun fades a -way in the eve- ning, 

2. All the cares of my life will be o - ver, 
3.1 shall watch for my friends on thatmorn-ing, 



fefeEEE 



im$ 



fete 



-Ik A A- 



And I have no more 
When the sun in the 
As they pass thru the 
-*- 

4 ■ r 4 — I 4 

■— r-l 1 1 

k— hts 1 1 ■ 



-fc 1-k: fc=r k. k ks— hk- 



£fc 



— 6— L|— 



3=4 

-• — » 



£=*=zj==i 



tr- •— 



=te 



8 

-3= #= ^== 



time here to stay; A new day will be dawn-ing in glo - ry, And they 

eve -nihg goes down; Then I'll wake with the saints in the morn-ing, And shall 
gates one by one;Bidthemwel-cometo thatgreat con- ven-tion, And we'll 



m- 



:p ^zzS_ 



-*-r* — a — 8 — £- 



HF ttL 



:t^p=p=p: 



=^ 



~h- 



^=q= r 



:£ 



— k 



Fine. Chorus. 



==p==rq=t— 



_- ft_ft- 
— \ — p^ — k= — ^ — *— 



D.S. And I'll 

-Ji-4. 



„Pj_ 



-^ c»- 



say 'tis an un -end-ing day. 
wear a white robe and a crown, 
sing there while a -ges shall run. When the sun 



When the eve-ning sun 



ft fo h P 

± 1 A F 1 r | !-"= r - ! 4 4 4 4 — 



fades a 



1- 



go there to live on and on. 






i 



« 



SB: 



|r— k — hr — fc" — S -- 



P P 



-I 



us 



ft-ft-tS-JS-l- 



-^ ^J- 



slow -ly fades a -way, 
way. And 



And my toil-someday 
day here is 

ft ft h H 

a * g W »= . 




done; 



here on earth is done;A new day will be dawn-ing in glo - ry, 



a IA11A sla 



Jj-_j_-t-_tr 



a^ 



OflPTrirtt. 1946. by James D. Vauehen, Msaia Publisher. 



E -K 



A — =*- r fc — 14 — 4 — 4 — I i-i A 4 — n 



'Honored Guest. 



tr- tr 



No. 12. The Royal Telephone 

F.M.L' Arr.by Bryant Johnson. 

j^Bg*^^gf===jFfe£ 



3S 






F.M.Leehman. 



V V 



l.Cen- trai's nev-er 
2. There will be no 
3.Cai - nal com - bi 

_>_-*- -A- 



y. 



^ 3 

al • ways on the line, Yon may hear from hea-ven,hea! - en, 

serv-ice, sen-ice, 
glo- ry.glo- ry, 



tel- e- phone is free, it was built for 
na-tions, sure- ly can-not getcon-trol Of this line to 

A- -A- -A- -A- _ -A- -A- -•>- -m- N -m 



_|— - - n . ./m. -,-. 



g=giEE»=e: 



iHi 




al- most an - y time; 'Tis a roy - al ser -vice, ser-vice, free for one and all, 
just for you and me; There will be no wait-ing, waiting on this roy-al line, 
an-chored in the soul;Storms andtri-als can-not, can-not, dis-con-nectthe line, 

u 



;t-lfP 1 1 1 1 z±— \-\A at * & *. * F K— H 



Fine Chorus. 




When you get in trou-ble,give this roy ■ al line a 
Tel - e-phoneto glo - ry, al-waysan -swers just in 
Held in constant keep-ing by the Father's handdi 



call. Tel 
time. Tel 
vine. Tel' 



W ^ — ta— U — 13_ 



phone to glo- ry, oh what joy 

phone to glo - ry, oh what joy 

glo ry, oh what joy di 



:t: 



$£ 




-a 
.Wemaytalkto Je-sus on this roy-al 



can feel the cur-rent 
can feel the cur-rent 

feel the cur - rent moving 




U b b U 

M ^~ 



9 •- 






w-i 



D.S 

5=3 



mov-ing on the line;Built 
Built 



the 



by 



b — b — b — D- 

by God the Fa-ther for His loved and own, 



2 



line;Built by God the Fa-ther for His 



-A- J 

-t=F 



i 



P>jJZ£' A . (^-f-A A * - _- 






loved 

h 



and 



own, 



=P= 



t= 



m 



Tbla Arr. " Cojprtght. 1946. bj Jum> D. V»u*han. Music Pobliabar in/'HoDored Goest. 



No. 13. 

R.E.P. 



My Home Above 
~l_ I — I — ^— 



Richard E. Powers 

-i— 



lffit-l^-4--^ 1— U-i 1 1 1 -h \-A J 1 Aj , L_, A 1_ 1 

EE a_| : _^_C # _ # _ # # _g # _C- ^ , , # _L # # _^ ^_J 

1. I am glad to say, I am on my way, To a man-sion in the 

2. Je -sus came one day, took my 6ins a - way, Andfrom Him no more I 

3. Won't yon come, my friend, on the Lord de-pend, Let Him save your soul to- 



3 r* — *■ — * * * — rl * ± * • — r* .* i* 1 




--N h-rH ' ! ^ — 



-1 — r 
4--D- 

> » — L # « *—Q* — L ~ " ^ ™ "— 

sky, the sky; Thereto live a-bovewith the ones I love, In the 
roam, I roam; I am free and whole, heav-en is my goal, My e - 
day, to - day; Thru His matchless love we shall meet a- bove. When the 



-■ 1 W k Is 1 M 1 1 1 a — hk k k k k 



Chorus. 



*f 1 — — W— ' ^ L £— '-&>- 



r 



i i i i) v 

hap-py by and by, and by. I am now on my way, 

ter - nal hap -py home, street home. I am now on my way 

shadows pass a -way, a - way. 

--I—4- — I- 



i^=?=!fe=^i=I 




To that home, there to stay; Safe at last, 

To that home, there to stay; Safe at last, 

■ i i 




7-5 ^ ■ r F W P — r -A- A * * m r^TT- 



_L 



— r-1 1- 



home a-bove, Rest with those I love, 

home a - bove, I shall rest with the ones I love. 






.<Z± 



:b— :' 






v ._ 



:^=t=p=fc=z= 



Copyright 1945. by James D. Vaueban, Music Publisher, in "Honored Guest. 



No. 14. Over In The Sweet By And By 



Mrs. H. G. G. 



Mrs. H. G. Gillock 



t) " I i -■- -53- -3- -a- -m- -*- -•- -■- -B- -2t -■-*3«- v 



1. Of - ten here we weepWheu ourloved ones fall a - sleep, And our hearts are grieTed,and 

2. Yes, it will besweetwhen to-geth -er we shall meet, In that hap-pyhome where 

3. Je - sua is the Light in that cit - y of de- light, There will be no heartaches, 

i .p. -». 

I P P p I 



-i — i — h — i — 

-p-trV-r- 



" I , -b- .—J- T I , -b- ~_l- -2- _j. -b-=- -B- -B- -B- -E 



I; -■- -z*~ " p -■- -si- -i" -*• -■- *■- -■- -■- -p- 

we are made to cry; Bat we'll meet a • gain and to - geth-er shall re -main» 
none shall ev-er die therewith them to dwell, nev - er- more to say fare-well, 
no more need to cry ; We'll be hap - py there, and the skies will all be fair, 

*Hfc — f-b*-rzsnr f^-fr— P-P^-rzs * *— rk*— M * k- r E^ - 



fcpz=p-=t£±E 



fe* 



£=* 



't==P=t2=t2= 






fe^E?_^fe3El 



O - rer in the sweet 



I P P P I 

Chorus. 

r p p p r u 

and by, sweet by and by Of - ten when a-lone I 
Oft a - lone I 



-2 — f— 13-- 



^ez*=^=tz^E«==»=»=Et=^^=^Et==fc==t=3 = t-t3 




l> b ■[ > 



i — r— r 



r? 



4 






p p - Q " n p p y ' "p y p 

pic-ture that sweet home, Just a-bove the love-ly shining starry sky;Loved ones lean 
see that home, Just a - bove the star - ry sky;Lo?ed ones 




ru 






p p' Bi r p p 

see, they beckon now for me, o-ver in the swe»t by and by, sweet by and bj. 
see, they beck - on me, to that 

-fc 1 r^ h n. P ' P i P f T — r 

I Uaa.-J.f- C 







> P — £4 



f"t 



lipppii 



Oopyrieht. 1945. by James D, Vauehan. Music Publisher, in "Honored Guest." 



No. 15. In The Garden With My Lord 

Adger M . Pace Minzo C , Jones 



f±=$r. 






1. To the gar 

2. His dis - ci ■ 

3. And they all. 



P4 _ ^ — p izp p — p 



A — * 

u 

den, all a - lone, Je - sus went to pray, 
pies fell a - sleep while He prayed a - lone, 
for-sook Him, then, and from Him they fled, 

-i* — ^ — * — h?= — ifc- 



«=£ 



1 Ft 



A-mong the 
Yet it was 

But Pe - ter 

-•- 






H 1 1 1 

-k i 14 J 



t/ i P ■#■ -#- i , " 



flow-ers that He loved, at the close 
just a lit - tie while from them, He 
fol- lowed Him a - far with his heart 

^kt A -A- A A l 

es— £=:*—* — *— Fa— *— *- 
Mj_p — u — D. 



v- 



:EEt3EHEpEi 



of day; It wasthere He spoke the 

was gone; Then I hear Him say to 

in dread; And with-in the pal -ace 



3=m 






r- 

D. S. Thru the gar-den I will 



words. in His 






o - ny, "Dear fath-er, if it be Thy will take this 
them,' 'Rise ye now and pray, The hour is come,' 'and then the mob took my 
hall, He, his Lord de-nied, And when he saw what he had done, bit - ter- 

-A=. -A- -A- -A A- 

.^_*_-»-_ ^_^ fi _jf_-f^P_ r t-_t-t^t_ r -(=:. ■ 

-* 1 hi ! — !-*-=• — *. a 14- 



I rt — ^ — FF 



- tr r r 

go, for my Lord contend, And all 
Fine. Chorus. 



14 £ — Ptfr» * £ 1&_ C^j- 4 14 3 



:b=z 



the way to courts a - bove, I will 



i " ^ 

v — A 

cup 
Lord 

iy 



m 



■=C5= 



bx 







■□ — b» — 



from me. " 

a - way. 'Twas in 

he cried. 



F P 

l-i 9 r 



H 

be 



-»- 

—i — 
-*- 



the gar-den 
A- 




I 
His friend. 

rr— fr— ft-i-l h-.-J^ 



:ti 



t=# 



all a - lone, Je - sua prayed for 



-A- A -A- 

-& — & — fe 1& — h 



JE 



pr 



^r-l- 



ibzzzi 

-I — - 1 



b-^ =J=C ± -^i^±:W±rd=^=^q --j -j =R 



me, that I might do 

f- 
14 



His bless-ed will, 

.A. _A- -A- -A 

£_jz_3Ea± 



and from 



be free; 



I r+— 1 1 1 r-l 1 1 ,i 

)4— H4r= 14 14 14 — f^S & 14 






— at 

CoDyrijht, 1345. by Junes D. Vauehan, Music Publisher. In "Honored Guest. 1 



::t: 



.c2__ 
1— 



No. 16. Till Toiling Days Are O'er 

Dr. Alfred Barratt Adger M. Pace 






1. Let us press a -long with a joy -ful song, There are better, brighter 

2. When the storm winds blow wheth-er weal or woe, Or when rag - ing bil - lows 

3. Sing a song of cheer, when the day is drear ,Thoogh our hearts are wea - ry,J 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

|S==ja — t> f—^ 1 



S J 



>^S 






days in store; 
wild- ly roar; 
sick and sore; 



■H- "J 

Let us trust in God, as we on-wardplod, Till our 
Let us do the right, Thro the day and night, Till our 
Je - sus comes to share e?- 'ry cross we bear, Till our 



faf±* 



I 



t=r 



— t — i — p — 

\T ■■■.-. » h 



- J*— E*— ^— f- 



=fc 



- -t— -I— -t— 

— -i 



HEEjE5 



J-*-f, 



ej 



*=* 



Fink Chorus. 



tm=t 



~pi=tEd 



£3dE 3 -f 



toi 



^ 



toil - ing days on earth are o'er. Till our toil - ing days are 

Till our toil-ing days are o'er, toil-in 

-*- | -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 



¥£ 



-> R- 



* 



* 



z=fzEE=:==fu=t2=E:t3=t3=t3-t2=t:=: 



h- 



t2=ta 




i£i 



5 



o'er, Let us love Him more 

days on earth are o'er, Let us love Him more and more, love 

:*: £: .?. a. :*: :* :*: <^T- ■* 

-A_ .A_ZfI_P_iA fc A_t n 



and 
the 



• m_l 



^=^==5=5=^=~^=^= t =P ; =F : 






fc±=fczzjKZ=^=fc=: 



:0= 



f- 



.# 

:=a~ : 







more; 

Sav-iour more and more ; 

_ » 



SB^W 



Let us praise His name, with a glad ac-claim, 



-p — p — tp — tp — f^ — p— p- c c-=c— — p=^— t— — 



Copyright, 1945, by James D. Vauuhnn. Masirrrnhlishe 



No. 17. 

Victor Hamner 



&=± 



±t£$=j=^*=t=*5 



Keep Holding on 

T.M.Stevens 

' j H " ~& 

— m 1 fi a5_ J 



£=£=£ 



-*— # 



A— | — I- 



-B-="i- 

l.Tho' trouble and sor -row may come your way, It seems that you trav - el a- 
2. The Cit - y of glad-ness a - waits us there, And sor- row shall nev - er be 
3. The sweetest of sing -ing we soon shall hear ,When Je-sus shall come for His 

!\ 4 *\ IN 

— i -^_, a a a : ,_a! *) M aJ -g - •!■- 




-f- 



:p=[=pi= 13— p: 



t= 



z^=t=t=±=fiHt==rt 



_| P— r-A A A A r— I- 



Ione;Some hap - py to -mor- row, we'll live for aye, So brother 
knovra;There'U be no more sad - ness,no pain nor care, So pilgrim, beep 
own; The bells will be ring -ing our souls to cheer, So christian 

.IS i N 

-l^f— A — r — A A -A— i * **—**- 



E|E: 



-A hA- 



:t: 



Chorus. 



V 



EEEFEp 



W — ~ai ' — I — ' — r ai — r T 



--4-rWU 

1 — H »- — ♦ <S>> 1 



I l>< |- I ' ' 

hold -ing on. Keep hold-ing on, keep hold ing on Keep 

Keep hold-ing on, keep, hold-ing on, 

I 1 

1 Ai_A H*l—A_ 

~ P-— » 1 i — 

h — u 1 »— 



¥fetEti±EEl 



— •-• — « ns> h 



t~ 



-P" 



f- 



|^=^E$Efe^EREEEEL==^=EEE^=^=3 
1— s ^— a — a^— B — a — »—y^ — - — -- — Fa — ■ — *Ha— -3 — 3 

f* -.- -m- f ~ 

id; Turn not a - way, 

Turn not a - way, hold 



-■- 
hold - ing to the Sav-iour's hand, to his hand; Turn 



k- -kr^ -k- -k- 

| 1— rf— P — P 



t 

d* 






LJ> 



.^L. 



3»=0 



I— 






^=t=tF 



-■ — ■ — -»- 



hold fast to -day, Till we shall reach the glo - ry land, glo- ry land, 

fast to -day, 



J« a! a! 






■#» 



*- -k J 



* J 



*= 



-*- — *- 



=P=^— z{z: 



EEEEEi^^i: 



:t=t=te 



Cocyrisht. 1946, by James D. Vaughan, Music Publisher, iM~" Honored Guest.' 



No. 18. In Sight of That Beautiful Home 

Fay Wallington J. Porter Thomason 



£1RF 






=±=d=rt==|=zfc=tJ 



=3=^ 



:szzl 



t=F=t 






1. Oh, my brother, to- day,ha?e you tho't of the cost, If the temp-ter should 

2. Have you tho't of yourfate on that ter -ri -ble day,Af -ter cross-ing the 

3. Turn a - way from your sins and be-lieve on the Lord,Hewill ban-ish the 

.A.:. -A- -A. -A. _A. .A- -A- -A- -»- 

z=gz±:-=z^j3L-=f— F=^=^=i=pi — r — r ~^ 

-A A A A A A— H 1 1 — 






=t=fc 



=} 



|-^=i=i=fes=ir=3=fei=i 



h m 



=d=±J: 



-J l-r-l i— 



:i 



^ * -^ 



leadyou to roam; When you come to the gate and your soul should be lost? 
bil -low-y foam; Whenyouface the great Judge and He turns you a - way? 
gath-er -inggloam; To be lost on that day you can nev-er a - ford, 

^s -Ai .A. .A. -A. -A- -A. -A- 

1 1 1 — — i 1 1 — H-r— I 1 1 ! * H * — » — r — 

- -cs — t£s — A A— r-A-= — A A e~ — A A \-& B 1 



$^fL=fdttt==$=&#z 



Chords. 



&■— ■- -*= 5— • s -l— i~a- [: .ai .-sir 1 !— •- 



JUL 



T2L 



:2L .231 ^: 



fTTr 



Sfc=3£=3fc 



Just in sight of that bean -ti - ful home. Just in sight of that 

of thathome, 

■A- -A- -A- 

—t 1_ 

-A A — A- 



OfefP — ' 1 H 1— fet 1 l 1 & — ;£s-+A A— H 



bp=p=bfz=tz=t=zt=^=p: 



fei 







=2=E^i=^zzi£B 



home, Where the an -gels so peace-ful - ly roam; 'Twillbe 

beau -ti - ful home, 

ht: • — * — l^— '£~—t~— r* : — • — • — • — • — •— rP^s> — • — •— -* 

-frt-W^ — i 1 1 1 h 1 1 1 1 1 — r-i 1 1 1 



w 



=t 



JU5 



fcl 



SEE 



■J, 



:4=f£fc 



— r~T E =r— ^ 

sad to be lost, 



f=H— N 5 






****= 



4i= 

i i ■ew 

Justinsightof that beau-ti - fol home. 




at such cost, to for -ever be lost. 
-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- .. 



wrrr r ft Mr M-^y^4# 



CoDyrisht, 1946. by Jamea D. VaBgban. Mosic Publisher, in "Honored Guest. 






No. 19. 

M.W.E. 



I'm Bound For Heaven 

Marion W. Easterling 



1. When I was wand'ring in the path-ways of sin, My life was then a 

2. I've left the plains of E - gypt for high- er ground, Where life is more a- 

3. Good-by to world-ly pleasures, hon-or and fame, I'm go -ing where the 



t-r-T-r^ 






_A A— r A A • A— r A— p— f" A—*— 

-i* — ^ — pb — I v — & — r* — I*- — ™ h — ** 



:lz -« -rH-F-d d — «^H-F« — « = P- = P- 




N i 

-H 1 — i 



fail-ure, stainswere with-in; The Saviour gent-ly whispered "why long-er roam," 

bun-dant, joy doth a-bound;Nolbng-er I am liv-ing a-mid thegloam, 

peo-ple all are thesamejl hearmy loved ones call -ing from o'er the foam, 

Pn i 

—_4 A_ — a — ^ A— A A— A — A— r A A s r^L, 

H* K — — P — r — p — P — I-* — a — * — *— a — A — * — rh 1 v \ 



Fine. 



/U?- — a — *— i A— i *-f-* — a — a — £j- — — 

f=^=t= 5 =p=t B=C cE? = . = s =?=F 



I'm bound for heaven , my home sweet home . 



h 



heaven, 



Chorus. 
-F* — 

_ L| 

r p — a 

p 

I'mbonndfor heaven, 












±irS=£g= 




I &— i — tr-17 



heaven, 



£=£ 






my home sweet home, With saints o'er fields e - ly-sian 



I long to roam , f or-ev - er ; 






-A— A- r A — p — E — A " 



■A! — A- 



m 



A * =] g 

, — C — ^ — «, — 



V 



fc£=i 



* 



tt 



fe 



¥ 






i — 9-m d- 



F"T 



Eg 



Join in the sing-ing, sing -ing, 'neath that bright dome, hal - le - lu - jah, 

-k- -k- 

A a A 5 r "t" — f- A A- 

* * * i h * — rb i b A - 

I- p tl P==P=i3— C P^=P P 1» 



p 1 



-3— -g- 



u 



Copyright. 1945. by James D. Vaueoan. Maaic Publisher, in "Hsnaied Gaest. 



V 



No. 20. Going Home To Be With Jesus 



JT 



John Taylor 






e 



1. I havestart-ed on a jour -ney, and I feel like go -ing on, I am 

2. Of -ten-times the way grows drea-ry, and my load is hard to bear, But with 

3. Sa- tan of • ten tries to hin-der, but I'm set to reach the goal, And with 

-A-, A — A a — .a_ a_ -_-__,*_*_-__ 



fe 



4lA =l 



ip=P=P=t=t=t=f: 



1 i 1 1 * H- 

— * a — ,*-f-A — h — W- 



A A A * A A A A * A- A h 



5=* 



* 






-J jd a — bH — 1-Ht — a 1- 1 1 — — I 1 ■-- — a a ■ — 



head-ed for man-sionsfair; Go ing home to be with Je - sus and the 
cour-age I press a - long;End-less r glo - ry waits me yon-der in that 
Je-sus I shall go thru; He will lead me safe-ly on -ward to that 

-A_ r p^_A »- r A A A A— 

t=t=tz=t=: 

A A A- A 

P P— P— P— 

Fine. Chorus. 

,_ r _£ &_ 




ones who long have gone, In that Cit 
home, when I get there, Prais-ing Je 
home-land of the soul, Bless - ed home 

m m aI d 4 S 






^=$ 



y that'sbuiltfour-square.Go -ing 
sus in hap - py song, 
of the good and true. 



D. S.Hal -le - lu 



se 



s=fc 



fcfe 



home, 



F 



=t 



a: 



jah, I'll soon be there. 

A — ^— M 1 - 



:=T5= 



■5 



go - ing home, 



I 



feel 



oh, hal -le -lu- jah, go -ing home, I'm go -ing home, 

zi-A_A 

9 



tr-tr-^- 



_A A 



TothatCit-y that's 
J) 



7=%-*- 



—A — m 
— i * 



&3&M 



-n— 






' A a 



-h — r — ■- 



_- 5 =Zt57 E ^Z = 

-_ P— ±i— A- 

-■ 1— « h" 



_A_,A 

. D.5. 



1/ - .p v y 

built four-square;Go- ing home, go -ing home, 

Go- ing home to be with Je-sus, go -ing home, I'm go- ing home, 



:==±=P=f: 



Copyrieht 1945. bw James D. Vaacimn Music Pabligherin "Honored Gaest. 



No. 21. Come Over on the Winning Side 

Rev. Dr. Alfred Barratt Adger M. Pace 

izza c 4 — ■__j : _« r _5_c i i c ^ — . — __« — *=n 

1. At the Lord's command, come and take yourstand, And wrestle with the true and 

2. Withthe brave and true, let us dare and do, And fol-low Christ our faithful 

3. Let your col-ors fly, Sa-tan's host de-fy, Andfal-ter not,what-e'erbe- 

4. Let us fol-low on, till the fight is won, With banners floating high and 

-A- -*- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -*- 

_4Zl£- r * k * **- — * — rt—T— f— t- r "tT-k — k^4=— P-ffc--, 



-p— h— - 



::~:-s=t3zi 



KW- 



tried, the tried ;Tho' the foe is strong, andthe fight seems long, 
Guide, our Guide; He bestows His grace in the hardest place, Come o-ver on the 
tide, be- tide; As we march a-long, singing love's sweet song, 
wide, andwide;Inthosemansionsfair,therearecro\vnsto wear, 
i 
|*| J M. ^i -±- -±- -A- -a- -*-=- -*- -a- -*- 




z=gz=jb=^=^=^=z £=^=g=g=|=p=^= 



:t 






win-ning side. Come o 

win -ning side. 



Chorus. , 

-TT-r-tmj t i — i — r — ^ 

ver en the win - ning 



^H ^F— »-Fi fcr- 






-F— F-T 



side, 
win-ning side, 

-*- 



:z=t:z:t===Fr:=zzz:Czz3 




-P — 1 1 — c L^ p -h- 



for the cause of right, Come o - ver on the win-ning side. 

win « 



r 



ning side. 



•^— P- 

:t=t: 



:i===4==4==tz= 



A- -A- -4- -A- -A- -A- 

r 



b?L 



■A= 






Copyright, 1945. by James D. Vaughan, Music Publisher, in ''BlisBful Showers.' 



No. 22. 

J. B. H. 



Jesse B. Hardin 



m 



t±± 



I'm a Gonna Sail Away 



1. On some hap-py morning bright and fair, when I meet Je- sua in the air, 

2. I'm a gon-na mount the skies a-bove,rid- ing on wings of per-fect love, 

3. When the Saviourcalls me home to rest with the redeemed, the good andblest, 



2JE 



I^Pir-4 Hg— k— k— k-r-fr— |r— £— -te — r g— & 



=F=Fi 






8 



1 ■ F 

— N — h— F — 



=p-- 






n 



I'm 



gon - na sail 



a -way 



Go -ing far a • 
to my new home;I'll be head- ed 
Then when I have 



w 



-A -f — - A- — ~A— r£ * - — -A- — -£ £ A — r ,= m 



:1: 



D.S.I'm a 



!t 



gon 

bove the star-ry sky, Where they say peo-ple nev -er die, 

for that gold- en shore, Where I shalllive for ev -er-more,I'ma gon-na. 

reached that blest es -tate,glad -ly I'll sing and ju-bi-late, 

| ^ >. £: j* 

§- * A A frs b «b 1 A A A! A A A A- n 
^±=E~ g=^=niEg!=j— EEg=g=t=g— ^4 4=H 

u u b u i b tf u ^ 

join that hap -py band,sing-ing all o - ver heaven's land, 

Fine. Chorus. k k |' kin 



^*= 



tf^t 



1" 



==*=»tK 



sail a - way to my new home. 

: ^=F=Fs : 
:£=Efc=EE 



I'm a gon-na sail a -way on that 



^=^=g^ a 



3: 



sail a-way 



^! 



E£ 



-to— J4- 



D.S. 



— ^ -_«; •— • •— c p g 1 p i ^ C^D 

won -der - ful day, I'm a - gon- na sail a - way to my new home; 



wM 



+. -v .r- >- 

-E A A A- 



ff-f^= l 



E 



Copyright, 1945. by James D. Vaaphan.'Masic Fubliehor it>3"Honored Guest." 



No. 23. 

W. E. G. 



Happy in Him Each Day 



W. Earl Grant 



2=4- 



trft 



ZEq=±==Jfc=te 



S**=* 



■* 



-fc— K— 






1. I was lost, de-spair-ing, no one for me car -ing, Walking in the 

2. E - vil may o'er-take me, but He won't for- sake me,Neith-er will He 

3. When my life is end-ed and my soul as-cend-ed To that land of 
_A a A A A— r A A =- — A a A_ r A — a 

^4 -a— a— Fa — * — a — a — a — a— b* — | b — b— \p— b~ Fa — | — 



-A A— r-* A A A A A HA 1 H }-, K- H H4- 




d=F,d=^=^=d=ti=^=t5:FH^ 









f 



-ward way; But my Sav-ioursoughtme,with His own life boughtme, Now I'm 
me stray;In His arms con - fid -ing, safe- ly I am hid- ing, And I'm 
less day ;Sing-ing songs of glad-ness,free from pain and sadness, I'll be 

i l N 



A— r f54 

I — \s>- — 



=£=*=$ 



t=S=£ 



t=i=P= 






-A- r A — = — A— A A— 

:^E F z=tzzA: " 



'p-p-f 




JL 



H - r -L 



, Chorus. 

1 1 — l—\ 1— r-^ - m ■ M = 1— 



5=T«zl 

P i 

hap - py in Him each day. I am hap-py in Him each day, ev-'ry day, 

r\ N i 

A = A A •— r ^ r r A A — A—A—A-pA 1 1 Jl. _AL 

^Ei=i==b==iL=i£=Ei=BE=AzzE^=- £=£— t=t=EE= 3 



r- l p— p- u p— r—p- 



fe? 



— fc-^ 



= A ' H — EzJEr r^-— = K — 



&-- 






*=rfb=3 



* 



i=r 



And I'm sing -ing a- long my way, on my way; Tell- ing out the 



Wa A It 



^ 



h 



h 



-i — i — 






rf 



r A A 

£ — I 



r— r 



PQ- — ■ — a P — a — r— i — « > — ■ — ■ — *■ — rd — "t- — ■ — d- — i — — i — H 

8f — * — i— 4— i— c «i — * — * — i — p — * — ^-^sfv- 

sto - ry of His love and glo - ry, I am hap-py in Him each day. 



a a A—, A = a — a a a— a A A — m— , , 

y^zt=t=f=t=E?=i=P=^=^=Cti:=EE = i— ^ = » = * = fc 
Wf? — a — a — * — a— tjk — t— b — b— :b— b~ ty=t— b — I 1 — lh ^— ' 

p— p— p— tj- r 



» ft ft ^-H k -hh ♦ ^ F F— hf=-r- 

^=p=zpz=t2=t2=P=t&=;p=t3=E=zbz:EBd 



Copyright. 1945. by James D. Vaaghan, Music Publisher. 



No. 24. My Never Failing Friend 

Rev.Dr.Alfred Barratt Dr. H. H. Martin 

£f -j: — v — L * — *-— 5 — - — ♦ — : «_ — J— L * — ♦ — - — - — ♦ — ♦ — = -*-J 

1. I havefound a per -feet joy, noth-ing ev - er can de -stroy, For the 

2. He be-held my sin - sick soul, and in mer-cy made me whole, Now the 

3. I shall love Him more and more, till this earth-ly life is o'er, For the 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

^F=F-=F=F.t== =^=t==t==t= — * — p = ppz=:i=t== j — r — rr-yn 

-S — b — b — b — ^F — t? — b~ t? — t? — P — & — Tt — \r =x *-^ 

% 



-t?- L p- 



^ r^ — ^ — ^ — #.- — " — • — ^ — \—\- — V— w F« — • 5 5 • 



-i&- -Ar 

All my sins have been for-giv'n, 
Sav-iour is my nev - er fail-ing Friend; 'Twas for me He bled and died, 

Then when life on earth is past, 

-P- -V- -W- -A- _ m -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

— P — P ' — b — b— c b — b — t? — tr 



L> 



5. 5. He has prom-ised good to me, 






t) -S- » * * 

I am on my way toheav'n, 

In my soul He doth a - bide, For the Sav-iour is my nev - er fail - ing 

He will take me home at last, 

A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -W- -F- -P- -F- * -A- -A- . 






here and thru e - ter - ni - ty , 
Fine. Chorus. 



--&- 



=t== 



b 



TT~^ 



Friend. Now the Sav-iour is my nev - er fail -ing Friend, 

nev - er fail - ing Friend, 
IN 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A -A- "*-*-» » !*" 



p 



—i 1 — r-rH' — J ' 1 n d— — i ' ii 



t 



f 






On His ev - er - last - ing mer-cy I de - pend; 

on His mer-cy I de - pend; 



±=t=FP=±& 



Copyright. 1945. by James D. Vaosrhan. Mnelc Publisher. In "Honored Gucet. 



:p=r-p~D=P= 



-|p— e — £= £ : 



No. 25. i' m a Gettin'Homesick 

Thos. R.Wilson Slow (Spiritual) Marion W. Easterlmg 




1. Lord, I'm get -tin' wea-ry on this lonesome road,Seems there is no-bod-y 

2. Here I'm dis - ap-point -ed, trouble's all I see, I canseeold Sa-tan 

3. On some hap - py morn-ing free from e-v'-ry care, I'll be go -in' yon-der 
■*- fc>» _ -_- 

§te^_I_£_5_- fe=^=:ttzt=t=C=^ri:B=:^=ti=S 
f_E_Efc_Et2_i__ 1?=t_^±E_*_g_f— t=tfc2=^=E=t2=Lt=t 



b u u 



p__E9g_3_j__E— EJ__jp________^E 






hereto share my load 
al-waystemptin' me; 
to a land so fair; 



Seems my heav-y burden's more than I can stand, 
It's so hard to trav - el thru the sinking sand, 
I've a mansion wait-in' on the gold-en strand, 

^_t:- r t:_k-_v— E-t: 



'HrP — ____ V— _# — P — i Fb— b— b — b — l — h— F— -— - — fi — P~ 



wfaster 



D. S. Meet my friends and loved ones at the Lord's right hand, 

Fine. 



£_3__33=gt-g_$ 



£=*=== 



=t 



I'm 

-_- 
:t: 



'j 



1 



a get- tin' homesick, lonesome for glo 

-A- -A- -_■- -A- 



_ — 

land. 



i 



• ry 

glo - ry 
" J — _= 



£B^^-^-^-^=Eg=g^=Efz— _£=£___ —J 



tr 



Chorus. 




$=_^ 



-&- 



<=ii 



3_t__fc ±_=S5feEg 

I'm a gat-tin' homesick, for glo - ry land, 

lonesome that bright glo -ry land, 

r- rf f,t -t- i y, _ k-,-3— g— &— -*— ---i-- 



^g^_^ _S _g_P ^ gz=g_:|_gg=_: _4 — , _ zz__ _j 

__b==tz=fc_4Mt=»=?^=_^t 



b- u r- 



D.S*. 



Want to see theriv-er, flow - ing, Join that hap-py band, up yon-der; 






OoDyrieht 1945. by Jamas D. Vaosrhan. Ma 



trp 

Poblisher. id "Honored Guest.' 






-^-S- 



H=^= 



No. 26. 

M. B. H. 



He Is Our Saviour 



M. B. Hooton 






1. Withvoic- es ring -ing, to Je- sus cling -ing, He is our Sav- iour,of 

2. We're sing-ing of Him be -cause we love Him, In earth and heav-en there's 

3. Oh, pil-grimwea -ry, when life is drear- y, Look up and trust Him, He'll 

— _A — m — =— r- A* — — - bm— r= - — A=— = — ♦ — T"— r *" — »f-*— 



te 



-p — p — p- 



r 






Him we're sing -ing; He knowseach sorrow, from Him we bor- row the sweetest 
none a- bove Him; In pas-turesfeed-ing where He is lead- ing, we fol -low 
make it cheer -y; He will not fail you, when foes a -sail you, He i3 your 

A A^— A * = - r _ A^_ - _^ Ai-jj — m- ' 



9- — U — y & — i* 2 - — a — a — *-h* — ** — * — P — h-H 1 n — h — b— I 

. — . Chords. 



te=^=^=« 



t===z=x 



— a| ^ ■ — a *l — — 1— 

-f * f^F =<— L^)- 

com -fort when we pray. 
on from day • to day. 
bless -ed Sav - iour too. 



Chorus. 
He 



our Sav - iour, our bless ■ ed 






r; 





•"THE?*"-" 

Sav-iour, the on • ly one on whomwe can de-pend; We'll sing a - 



— A- 



>*p 14 |4- — I* 14 14 — — F F F F — h 1 — 

^=F— 1 — p — p — ^ — f — t — ' — F — c -- 






< — *i — *-F^ — 3^— a — *- 



-^_ 



boutHim,andnev-erdoubtHim,He is ourbless-ed Sav-iour and our Friend. 



e^F* 









I — I — p — tP" 

Copyright. 1945. by .lames B. Vnairhan. Mosic Poblisber. Id "Honored Guest 



No. 27. March With the Captain True 

L. E. B. L. E. Butrum 






1. The Lord is Captain of His ar -my, Are you a sol- dier in Hiscamp; 

2. Let prayer and faith now be your watchword, To put the dev - il on the run; 
3- When war and sin here, all have vanished, We'llsay good-by to this old world; 



-A— A- 



^V-Ar- *— r* * * * * *— — k — A A— r-A * 14 A — fiA A-rP 2 - 1 - 

— ^— i — ^i — i — D — P — D — D~ 1 — ' — " — ' — t — p — p— T; — p^ 



:t: 



—d *— h 5 — £■ * — a — a " — ■"*■ al — a— her— ' 1 — 1 ' 1 — b^"! 



p p p - * * ^ 

If youare,marchforward'gainstthe en - e - my, With oil of faith in your lamp. 
Pray and God will give to you a great re -ward, Wheo vie - to -ry youhave won. 
And our mansion will be all that we have wished,Wherelove-ly gates are im-pearled. 



is 



i — !•— h»' — • — » — » — » — #— H • — I i — 



ff=p=ES=E£ 



■^i — p — i — r- c -r— r— i— p— p- c — " 



jp* 



Chorus. 



I 



Cap 
March with the Cap - tain, 

__* 1 J 1 

rS-b* — • — # ~F ■ 



=f5 — =j — =P_2i — zp_sj — rp_pi — q zfxz — d: 



tain, 



* 



1 



on - ward, brave and 
on - ward, brave and 



true, 
true, 



3 K L F- 



r _3 



— p — ^— g — =^— g — ^— g — ^p- 



:a k _ 

PUP 

step with Him 

Ev - er keep step with Him in 



idzzf — g — P— 



P 
in 



_JM__^_£ 






-•- 

all 

all you 



you do; 
do; 



J=±=qpr= 



I — 



g 



3=4= 



.-,— -1— i—H 



fc^=^=^E3==^=ifa====^^^:h = * = ^==H=ES[ 



P I w 's-xvi/ 

Therewillbe vic-t'ry af -ter'while, Christains look up, pray, sing andsmile. 

sn — K— *— f "-(-A—A—,,—*- C^aC-L -_.^A_ A_Ja_|2a^_.. 

fcP=i=fcE^ = ^— P=(:=Et^^&=zp=p==pzEt=zSp:E=EpiB 



Copyright, 1946. by James D. VaaghaD, 'Music Poblisher Id. "Honored Gaest.' 



No. 28. 

Rev. E, J. Carlisle 



Over There 



R. G. Wilkins 



f*fr&f 



ifeliliiPppfp 



1. There's a home be-yond the sky where the saints shall nev-er die, And thsri'll 

2. Just be-yond the shin-ingstrand, in that pre-ciouspromisedland,We'lltake 

3. Won't that be a hap -py time in that fair and sun -ny clime, When the 

ft- -ft- 



£=*=£=£ 



=t 



£l 



& 



» — #- 



:=)=: 






* * >=* ♦ * 4» -^' ""- * "k- " k " -, k_ ' 

P=£ 



sfc^jj-zj 



£ 



± 



be no tear 
Je - sus by 
bells be - gin 



33= 



eye o - ver there; 
the hand, o - ver there; 
to chime, o - ver there; 




Voic - es there will sweet -ly blend, 
He'll pro-claim us as His own 
Walk-ing down the streets of gold, 

i 



% k k Fine 

2_ca — . — g_- — , — , — s _z s — S - L Z ^ J 



o-ver there. 



prais-ing Christ, our Sav-ior Friend, In that world that has no end, 

and con - duct us to our home, And we'll know as we are known, o-ver there. 

sin? - ing songs that ne'er grow old,Whilethe a - ges there un-fold, o-ver there. 

t g=p— g— p— f— p— ^= t F-^=^ r f J 

D. S. We shall sing a-round the throne, o-ver there. 
Chorus. k . N 




-J^-b-J 



^^=^^4^- 







ver there, 

Ajl : 



ver there, 



=$=£fc= 



o - ver there, 

JLl-J 



o-ver there, We shall know as we are known 






£=*f* 



Ji 



D.5. 



FT" 






§* rTTT" " ^" TfT 

o - ver there; - ver there, o-ver there, o- ver there, 

o-ver there; - ver there, 

,. -«- ■•■ -/•- ^ * - J ^ s^ iz_«L^J_«-4— J- 






Copyright, 1945. by James D. Vauchan, Mu 



■ in "Honored Gnoat. 



No. 29. I Will Soon Be Going Home 



G. A. P. 



G. A. Phillips 



Z 1± — m ^ L_) j— # • Q0 L" B « 9 9 L # . 



a — j — jp — a: 
-■^- -♦- -♦- -♦ " ^ -♦- -•- ^ 

1. When my work is done, with the life-crown won, I will leave for 

2. While I trav-el here, there is naught to fear, With my Sav -iour 

3. On some morn-ing bright, I will take my flight, Up to my e 

-h* -♦- -♦- 

;-; } A A 1 A A A H A A- 

fatr^ — «-4- = L. — L— S 



sss 






a 



S3 



,(- # » # # S C_J # 4 1 # LH a_^ — m 



Heaven's shore, bright shore, There to shout and sing, glo - ry to my King, 
by my side, my side; He will lead me on to the glo - ry dawn, 
ter -nal home, sweet home; Then a song I'll raise to my Sav -iour's praise, 



Jfe=T 



?=fc=Jfc=t 

-I 1 g- 






:fe 



M 



&=£ 



Chorus. 

IN IN 






-# #- 



# a l # — p — * — t 1 a. — . — 1 



1 1 1 

And His name I shall a - dore, a - dore. 
Where I shall with Him a -bide, a -bide. 
Un - der - neaththat heav'nly dome, bright dome 
-•- ^ 111 



I will soon be go - ing 






y\y [ 



■ r i- — -p — r* -P — -i" — t-n 



K 



E3 



fir 






I V 

home, nev-er-more a -gain to roam; Then my soul shall 

go -ing home, no more to roam; 

-1— -i— -*- -*- -♦- +-- >- -*- _ 

j- * & * * *— r A 1 1 A— rs A s m "T — rA- 



a 



A— r A 1 1 A— r-= A m — v — ■" — r 

E±z=t=zt=z»d j — E=EEt EE fc zEi 




'IN 



^^E£3=te^^^^ 



I=s==jt=3=3== 



-F — #- 



-*- 1 l 

rest with the good and blest, In that bright e - ter -nal home,8ffeetl 



« 



*, 

■*-£ 



BB^a 



^F=E=P=^ 



t? — V 



^~ : 




r f ,,-^-ft*- 



^»==t 



*=tf=tf 



I 



Oopyrlgbt. 1945. by James D. Vaogban. Mosic Publisher, in "Honored Gueat. 



No. 30. 

Rev. H. 0. K. 
■It 



Strength For The Battle 



Rev. Harry 0. Kutz 



IfflA — i 1 *\ 5 • ™ M — n~ i ^ — •! — F5 4 ■ — • F-<s? 



-•- 
-#■ 

1. Strength for bat- tie He will give to you till you shall win the crown, 

2. When the bat- tie rag- es and your heart grows weak and faint with fear, 

3. Soon the Cap-tain of our souls willcometo lead us home on high, 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- ~ -£*- 



IEEE 



tr-tr-fej- 






ifeg 



#— p- b t? p b — " Terr— 



£=|5: 



# 






fJ -A- V 

When in the fight for God and right, He is look-ing downjln the 
Then don't for - get that God has said, I'll be al -ways near; 'Tis the 
Then ev - 'ry bat- tkj will be fought, no one else will die; Fol- low 

-A- mm '*- "*- -*" — P" -f*" -^" ■*■ K7 

k \k 1 r- ■ — I* — * 






ii==iez 

p- 



D. S. Fear not 



^S^H^&l^^ 



mid- die of the bat -tie, He will send a surge of pow'r, Then your fainting soul 
bless-ed promise of the Lord, His word can nev- er fail, Marching on- ward with 
on j, un- til we hear the sound of God's trnmp in the air, Sa - tan then will have 

-A- -A- -A---A- -A- -A A- -A- * -s£s- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

i=t=t=t=[:*=p=»=.t:=Ft=N=?!=?=F ' 



^3= 

tho 



-0 
o' th 









tcF 



heforce of hell as -sail you, can't you hear Him say .strength suf 

Fine. Chorus. 



fi -cient for 



|=^^=z=zE?==±=i==3=^=fe=E^===^b=?=^ 

will find strength to win in the try - ing hour. Strength for bat -tie, the 

Christthe Lord, your spir- it should nev -er quail. 

lost the con-flict,peacewill be ours up there. Strength for ev-'ry bat -tie, 



tie, pow- er to win the fray. 

£_ r _|_ r JV=_( _&. * 




t=E=q 



p=f^=zp=p=p=p«=i-[:=it=q 



D.S. 



-*-Fj ^— 1— ^ — m- V <s>— 

you, Strength for bat- tie, will fill you thru and thru; 

Strength to win the bat -tie, 



- A - JfL -V. 



=h=t=F?=f 



pzzi=Ft==e=£=F===r=r=P=FP z: =fl 
£E^EfeE^iEE0 



Copyright. 1945 by James D, Vaoghan. Moelc Publisher. Im " Honored Goest. " 



No. 31. 

K. D. Henson 



I Have The Blessing 



Betty Henson 






:^^ 



1. I am so hap - py as I trav - el a - long, 

2. Je - sns is with me and will keep me I know, 

3. Liv-ing in Ca -naan,on the moun-tain of love, 



I have the 



-A- -A- -A- 



-A- -A- -4- -A-^N J 

_« e — a, P — k — «__«__ -t—'f—tl—" — *_ r r__p_Tr — 



IB 






^— ^==f5 



-* — &4k 



£=3: 



:_bj — 1—P* — 



bless - ing, way 

-A- -A- 

r -f. 



§g^=g 



p r ". p 

Je - bus has 
down in my heart, oh, glo - ry; Serv-ingHim 

Headed for 



fe- 



=B=£ 






D.SHighon the 






saved me and hag filled me with song, 
tru - ly,where-so - ev- er I go, 
heav - en and my man-sion a-bove, 

-A -A- -A- -A- I 



feE^f 



lEZt 



I have the bless-ing, way 

-A- 



:[*=£=£ 






*=tn 



tz=t= 



i .iu_ t=p_=t2 



=E=^ 



moun-tain, from the temp-ter a -part, 
Fine. Chorus. k 



4 — S — *j- 

down in my heart. I have the bless-ing, way 

-A- -A- -A- A- A- f* 



fct 



^ 



p 

down in my heart,oh, 






I k ► E 



s 



:*-: 



bp=t 



i 



s 



d.s. 



Efe£=t£=£ 



*± 



praise Him ,1 have the bless-ing , way 

-A- -A- -A- A- -A- 



down in 



i 



=t 



T± 



$*=£=*: 



£z±tr=|=tn= 



*fc=fc 



-tr- 

myheartjl'mliv -inj 



— *— s-b 



£=£ 



Copyright. 1945. by James D. Vaagban, Music Publisher in "Honored Guest." 



v 



fep=h 



No. 34. Let Us Sing and Tell the Story 

Millard A. Glenn C. N. (Men 




=3=±qpt5=tos 



-h-P — W — P b 



^ -♦- -♦- -♦- -•- -♦■ 



:3=| 



a 



1. Let us singGod'spraises as we on- ward go, To that bless -ed Land where 

2. Let us shout it out to all of Ad-am's race, How He saves the lost thm 

3. Let the Sav-iour'smes-sagering from pole to pole,ThatHis sav-ingpow'rmay 

. i--^~^-rff — A — F — *— rt — t — t * — * — * i — * — r~ * — i^-i 



:^zzzzzt==:£== 



^F^zz^zz-.^zzgzzzip 



I ' " " r r I L* g , 

^zjs=j p^=^_ ^j: F pr- j -^— TTtr ifr l> fa 

^tz-zz-zzzjzz-z^zzit^zzl-zzfc-z :£z£z*zzzp 



z«5zz£ 



y# 



prais-es o-ver flow; Let us tell the news of Christ the cru -ci -fied,How He 

His redeeming grace ;Let the sto - ry true, keep ringing loudand clear, That the 

come to ev- 'ry soul;Let us lift our voic - es in the grand refrain, "Hal -le ■ 

J-pE^Z^E ^N z tZpfez S^gZg 

Chorus. ; ^ K 

H-t-t-r- h fa n fa ivJlJ U/ ". ^ BE-^ 



f 1 i — — 0-<~0 1 — 0--4 l-L»--# 



■"tr-T 



-♦- -#- " - ' -fi- w ^ -*- - - v p v p | 
died for all who will in Him confide. Let us sing 
world may hear and know it ev'ry where. Let us sing and tell the sto 

lu - jah,gb-ry "till He comes a-gain. 

to." . fi 



and tell 
ry of 




b 

tree; Shout it out 

on the cru- el tree; Shout it out with love and 



zzzz:=*7|:^zz^zz3zp2rzzzzz: 

ZZ^ZZTA5_:iZZilZZ3ttiIZAZ:ST3' 

p— p* — p r p =ri 



7-5 "*~ — * 



■ A* A 



m 



-*£-- 



:pz 



Copyrijrh J 1946, by James D. Vaajrhan, Maoic Publisher, in"Honored Gaest*. 



lo?e and glo-ry. till the year of ju-bi- 



Let Us Sing And Tell The Story 



— L #- 

ry, Je-susdied to make us free. 

lee, Je-sus died, He free - ly died to make us free. 



■»- — 0, 



FT 



B^P 



^=^ ■> - 



isK=g=life=a=S=&=a=NHEf 



' >. J J J i J 



£_' 



tcr£=tAs 



No. 35. We'll Never Say Goodby 

Mrs. E. W. Chapman J. H. Tenner 

■-J- 



te 



* 



-ft— fcrft: 



fjEEjEE* 



^g^^^ 



1= 



1. Withfriends on earth we meet in glad-ness,Whileswiftthe moments fly; 

2. How joy - ful is the hope that lin-gers,WhenloraIonescrossdeatli'ssea; 

3. No part-ingwordsshalle'er be spok-en, In yon -der home so fair; 



MM 



:t 



D-l — trl — cr 







Yet ev - er comes the tho't of sad -ness, That we must say/'Good-by." 
Thatwe,when all life's toils are end -ed, With them shall ev - er be. 
But songs of joy and peace, and glad-ness, We'll sing for-ev- er there. 

_A A A_ r A- Jt_tU * ^ ^ ■*■ 



t: 



1 tIA 1 | 1 1 1 Ai A _ 

.=p=t=fc=p= -? — t — t — ?—\y n 



Chorus. ■ 



F=Ptt 



p±£ 



: S= 



_l — |. 






We'llnev-er say good -by inheav'njWe'llnev-er say good-by,(good-by;) 



A__ A A A— pA A— A PA_ E A A— rf » • •_., 

I V 1 v — L p — i i p — L ■ 



-D- L p- 



-I — tr 



3=* 



3^ 



1 



*=B 



-#n 



:|: 



For in that land of joy and song, We'll nev - er say good -by. 



No. 36. Living In The Shadow of The Crosa 

E . S . Elton Spears 



ffl — a— *-F 3— iHai— a— I— if—ft— ?Hr^ — 4 — a — sEElEi 

1 -•- -« - m 0- -0- ■ ■ 

P b 



1 Once I was lost up -on the mountain, wan-der-ing far a - way from God, 

2. Free-ly He lift- ed me from darkness in - to His glo - ry light di - vine, 

3. Won-der-ful joy is now up -on me, flood-ing my soul from day to dav, 




trr 



I) P p 

But the dear Sav-iour came and saved my soul from loss, my soul from loss; 
Giv-ing me par -don there, and cleansing me from dross, from sin - ful dross; 
And I no more up - on my pil - low have to toss, I have to toss; 

-4 — * — 14 — L4 — 4 — 4 — 4 — 1 1 1 — u- — \- — f — 1 c — j 



:-^-p— p 



= E P^ 



% V ■ p p p p - " ' 

)— a— a— ^ -F j— a— ai— ^— I— j — ^rj^~Y^r^ — i — ; — g — 1-1 

-0- _^_ -A. .^_ 



b b 

Giv-ing me light to see the dan-ger in the dark way which I had trod, 
Set-ting me on the sure foun - da-tion, brightly with Him I now can shine, 
For I have planned to go to heav-en glo-ry to God, I'm on my way, 

-0- -0. .0. 






-S^plA 14 A 8- 



t=8=2=8=P^=f=-t— t 



^P=P= 1= P=P=P=^==0 I =P=P=P=P= ^'- 



D.S. Following 



P— 17— P— 



af-ter my Re -deem- er, tho' the dark bil- lows round me toss, 
k Fine. 




D 



; 



the shad-ow 



4 A 4 — F* * * 1* 1 1 H 

BEE B3aEi 33 

pHnRTTS P P P 



h. k.. 



the cross, 
the shad-ow 

h h 



of the cross. 

I\ A 1 



rf= — ; 



Chorus. 

tJ * b 

Hap-py to day, 



-b-p 
Hap - py to 



=^= 



-6_J)_JU--| 



1 



%=£ 



der the cross, 
der the cross, un 

.A. _A_ ^4. _*. 

~~ft ft ** ft ft ft — I* 



un ■ 
day.un ■ 







Cooyrisrht -1945 by J»mos D. Vauehan. Music Publisher. In " Honored Goeat. " 



Living In The Shadow of The Cross 



D.S. 



^*=^P3 



St 



z L r== 

S 1 J F P 
tf U I 



£==& 






:=1; 



-A A A •- 

$ p p I 



Fear-ingno harm, count-ing the cost; 

Fear-ing no harm, count-ing the cost, count-ing the cost; 




No. 37. 



Goodby 



£ 



fv 



-I- 

i 



i — p — ? — y — h~ 

James D. vaughan. 



±: 



*=£ 



=t 



*=* 



3= 



r^ 



1. Sav - iour, bless us as we part, Fill our souls with love di - vine; 

2. If on earth no more we meet, Let us meet at God's right hand; 

3. Here's my hand that I'll be true, For that bless -ed home pre - pare; 

4. That will be a hap - py time, When for - ev - er free from pain; 

5. While e - ter - ni - ty rolls on, And new glo - ries e'er un - fold; 



m 



t— e — r 



t=t= 



£ 



m 



m^t 



v— V 



1 p—tr 



m 



-l—r- 



i 



fit 



2* 



=ft 



s 



\t=t 



1 — 

Com-fort ev - 'ry trou- bled heart, May we feel that we are Thine. 
Where we shall each oth - er greet, 'Mid the glo - ries of that land. 
Will you prom-ise me that you Will meet me o - ver there? 
In that pure ce - les - tial clime, All our friends we meet a - gain. 
We shall greet our loved ones there, On the streets of shin - ing gold. 



i 



t= 



^=S 



:£ 



f—r— r 



j=t 



m 



itZ^tE 



Chords. 



s 



« 



i=t 



±=±. 



=£ 



Td — *" 



J— ^- 



•OLl 



Good- by, good - by, If on earth we meet no more; 

Good - by,good-by,dear friends, go od-by, no more; 



I 



jCl 



-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 



1 



P P P- 



jszztc 



-I — I- 



*=*: 



-tmr 



- rr— r 



K-- a— 



£=ft 



s 



■^ 



7^ 



Lo^ 



rrr 



Good - by, good - by, May we meet on heav-en's shore. 

Good - by,good-by,dear friends, good-by, bright shore. 



-A- "A- -A- 



1 



I [ 1- 



■#■*■ + ■*■ 



1=1= 



fc*E 



U-J-i_i 



35=ts=ts: 



=U=t2= 



James D. Vaughan, owner. 



No. 38. 

Arr. F. R. 



O Happy Day 



Fred Rich 






=ft 



=fc 



1. I once was lost in dark-est night, , 



m 



P v & 

And could not 

2,'Twas grace that taught my heart to fear, And grace my 

3. My heartis fixed ' " " on thee,0 God, No more in 

IN N IN fN N 






jaEgSEBEgjg^zEfg 

S 311 — — :3 -h— h— -,— h— h— »— #-R- : 



t=p=p=^=^=p: 



"p-t? 



=tt- 



:5=S: 



fefc^ 



— l-f— \>* 



•J 



f-F- 



i^zbrfc 



;fc=*=£ 



:^=^ 



45 



4; 

■s- 



;=&= 



see. . 
fears . 
sin 






the way; But Je - sus brought 

re -lieved; Howpre-ciousdid. . . 

I'll roam; Fori am in 



&E 



:p=p-p=tz::t: 



s=Ba 



-p-p-p- 



:zb- 



P=p: 



P=P— 



RP^^ 



*=* 



=fc 



:=& 



=45: 



^=£= 



> u P v \j 

to me the light, Andsaved my soul 

that grace ap - pear, The hour I first . 

the nar-row way, And it will lead. 

m r\ r\ i\ is rs 

a F k— r-J ^ 1 ^— — ^ 



EBEE====ES 

L -= * A * A 5— ■ 



P P P 



.that 
he- 
me 



_E5rn = ?— 2-Ett 



-fc 5- 



p— tr 



|e^^ 



fe== ^f ^ 



n 

fi. S. And live for Him each 

Fine Chorus. 



t- 



day 

lieved. . 
home. . . 

h h 

:^zzjtz 



P P 



-£ L 



"p y P P 



h h 



O hap - py day, hap - py 

0- hap - py day, 



& 



day, each passing day 



h 



* — « — •— * — r- -g-_ ±: — 

3zz-c=bz=n==e==:==zzzzd 



O 



♦ — , 

P-P 



£HV#=J: 



F-P- 



"1 s 



iiili 



: C-r 



=1 



s3c= 



f 



p p 



r 



' ' " " V V \ u u v v 

day, hap-py day, When Jesus came, When Je- sus came my way, He camemyway; 

-± ± * • "A" 

__±:_t-_f_f-_t: 

Hl — Is— I* — h- 



— t- X " T~-TZ-T- r — *— *— k— s — «_ r «_»_fl k _- k — f 

_^_p_P_»_5_b; 1 — p — p — p — f= — t= h * — 5 — ^=p — 5 — 



Oooyritrht. 1945. by James D, Vaajrhan. Music Publisher, in "Honored Gaedt." 



O Happy Day 



D.S. 




v~v 



L r-p- 



V P V: V. 'V V V 

me how to watch and pray, - 

He taught me how to watch and pray, to watch and pray, 

.^- g -«_*-t— t— r-p 17 — ' F— f— r— F — n 



p— p 
No. 39. I Feel Like Traveling On 

Wm. Hunter, D. D. James D. Vaughan 

4 — 4 — \-r4 — 4 — ft — h — ■— 



& 



B3 



3=e 



1. My heav-'nly home is bright and fair, I feel like trav-el - 

2. Its glit-t'ring tow'rs the sun out-shine, I feel like trav-el - 

3. Let oth - ers seek a home be -low, I feel like trav-el « 

4. The Lord has been, so good to me, I feel like trav-el - 

A. *■ *• ~ * 



ing on; 

ing on; 

ing on; 

ing on; 



^3=1: 



m 



*£=|c 







i 



:s 



-j — -j- 



J=j — E P' 1 + 



* 



5 



si 



£1 



Nor pain, nor death can en- ter there, I feel like trav - el - ing 

Thatheav'nly man - sion shall be mine, I feel like trav - el - ing 

Which flames de-vour, or waves o'er- flow, I feel like trav- el - ing 

Un - til that ble ss - ed home I see, I feel like trav - el - ing 



£=£ 



:t: 



-•- — -•- 

:fi=P=P=t= t 



Chords. 

-s — ft- 



3= -fr-fr 



*=*t 



I 



Yes, I 



§1 



u • tr~b r i *- 

feel like trav - el - ing on, I feel like trav-el 

trav - el - mg on, 
# -#- -#- -fc- 



ing 



£=£ 



t=t2=i2=t=^=b 



!=£= 




1 



t=* 



T7 



=P=3E 



f=p=r 



4=*=a 



-$-*- 



-i — i- 



tfc 



3: 



3e; 



r 



on; My heav'nly home is bright and fair, 1 feel like trav-el - ing on, 

trav-el-ing on; 



3 



££££* 






*£ 



:t=t 



-» — » — e — #- 



£=$=t 



t=t=Jl 



:£P 



Copyright, 1936. by James D. Vaoghan, renewal. 



No. 40. 

Urey S. Lindsey 



I'll Be Singing Over There 



Melody by U. S. L. 
Harmony by Vol Sumrall 




1. When the bells 

2. When I reach 

3. Cir- cles bro 



a -bove, are ring-ing, bells are ring- ing, And I 
my home up yon-der,home up yon- der, Free from 
ken, will bemend-ed,will be mend -ed, Joy e- 

♦ > -♦- t :ff / _ F _ F _-*_£: 



-j . 1 1 1 1 1 1 r fc — 1± — p p i 1* . — . 

_^4===zE==ts— ts=ls=l£zztiz=ts=E==b==t2===±====d 



^=^ ; 



N N 



ztszztsz^s: 

1/ U V 



mz. 



w 



-^ — t? — t? — f- 



"$ 



reach 

sor 

ter 



— J£=ztozc=^==t5Z 

*— »=B - _*L_ 

• — -s L S — • — * — * — 

P P 



!fe 



P b *p M ~ ~ P 

theCit-y fair, the Cit - y fair; I will stand 

row, pain and care, from pain and care: With the saints, 

nal, great to share, so great to share; With those ma 

-*- -m- -*- -♦- -#- N -♦- -♦- -♦- 

4* & A £ A A - r - »- — A A a 1 1 1 1— 

8 



^^Ss=^=t 



9 ?_t7_tp ■ ■__■ ■ ■ 



ts: 



^ 



-.-I- 



I 



P y u U i; i^ L/ X 
and join the sing - ing, join the sing - ing, With the an 
no more to wan-der, ne'er to wan-der, I'll be sing 
ny voic - es blend- ed, voic- es blend- ed, I'll be sing 

-j— -j-- -j— -h- -p- >- >- >•- >- 

l-tT+r-i 1 P— Ft — ti^czzztzzit^^t — = 



S— b— b — b- 



V 



4=- 



izzzfczg 



* n v r^ 

Hr^ 1 g— N - f~ 

I_t # ■ ■ # _t~ 



D. S. I'll be sing 
Fine. Chorus. 

n r\ I ^ — 



=z=£=fctE* 3 
izzz^zz:!— 5=^=H 

p— P-P — ^ 



I? P V ^ 

gels I'll be sing - ing up in 

ing o - verthere,yes o • ver there. I'll be sing-ing up in 

jv ^ ■* i -»- -#- -•- ^_ -•■ 



iixt^ — .^.^ ^^^^ 



-r 

ing o - ver ther e, yes o - ver there. 

A » » A A ii- 115 — 

~p p— p— ^— P p— f „ 

heav-en, When I reach that home-land 

heav-en, up in heav-en, When I reach that home-land 

-♦- -•- -♦- _-*"- tK- K 

-a ■ ■ 1 P- 

£=P=£ 



.t^ — ■ — ■ — - — 5 1 d 



— £ — J — p — ■ — J" — iff r 



Copyright, 1945. by J»m.» [) Vnoihtn, Mnnir Publisher, io "Honored Goest. " 



I'll Be Singing Over There 



W^? 



w 




h»— m— A — a m ■— 

-t?-t?-t?~tJ-F-- — — — IP — IP— t?— ~t7 i/ „ „ U i/ V 

fair,that homeland fair; When my robe and crown is giv -en, 

When my robe and crown is giv -en. crown is gi? -en, 

, [* I* ,»— ■— te— ~ hs— h— h— i — hrd r-FP— F— F — : F— F 



No. 41. Be Still And Know 



£— tr- 1 P=P— P=P= : ^^ 



J. M. Kenson. 



fc=fc 



W. H. NELSON. 



£ 



h — b 



i^p 



K 



it 



r 4l 8 



5 



* 



1. Fear not, soul, a -long life's way, Tho' rough the path that thou dost plod; 

2. God is thystrenghin time of need, A pres-ent help when troubles come; 

3. He mak-eth wars and strife to cease, The spear He cuts, the bow He breaks; 

4. The Lord is with thee on thy way, Fear not the path that thou must plod; 



£ 



^/HA A Jt 1^ 14 14 



£=^=£ 



3BE 



b b b 



P P P 



-b— b— U- 



sppp 



i 



fe — fe 



M=£ 



-&-£ 



& — b 



^ 



* 



8=8 



ff 



Let not the winds thy soul dis-may,"Be still and know that I 
He is a wondrous friend in-deed, And guides His trust-ing chil ■ 
He bring-eth ev • er ■ last • ing peace, The sleep-ing na-tions He 
Take heart and press a • long each day, Be still and know that He 



If 



ft f i t: 



Hffttftf 



am God. ' 
dren home. 

a • wakes. 

is God. 



P P P 



£=£ 



Chorus 
_h 



M 



£ 



£=fc 



-M-: — I 



:£=£ 



h-f - t- 



»■ a t i 



m 



"Be still and know that I am God, Be still and know that I am God;" 



PN 



H 1 i rnt t T f if i 



£=£ 



P P P 'f p-4^— Mf 



i 



fe=fe 



H — * — *- 



3 — d-^ aizS 



1 



£ 



^i^ 



Whencaresdis-may, I hear Him say, "Be still and know that I 



am God." 



#■ 



£ 



Si 



£=£ 



±£ 



^ 



P P b- 



COPYRIGHT, 1935, BY JAMES D. VAUGHAN. 



No. 42. 

H.F. 



Come, Prince of Peace 



Harkins Frye 



a_a_ 5 t2L_ # _ # _ # _ # ._3_F B~t3 0— c «E* 



'■si. 

2f 



b b b b b b ' 'J" £ ■& fc T 

1. When Christ, our Lord, on earth did roam, on earth did roam, 

2. This world to-day, is filled with care, is filled with care, 

3. The Lord, a-lone, can bring us peace, can bring us peace, 

-k is r\ 



dr£=&=S3=*M 



— 4 — 4—4 — 4 A 1 * — r -A — * — * s 



— . — _ — _ — ^ — 4 — .^ — M — ^ — ^ — _- 






.,_ g ^-t-t=-^-t= — sp — *Vr*J5T& 

He said that wars would sure - ly come, wonld sure- ly come; 

Dis-tress and pain are ev - 'ry-where, are ev- 'ry-where; 

And cause this war and strife to cease, and strife to cease; 



:=fe=g: 



a 



4 14 4 4 4 4— r _ ^ 4 






K 



--\- 



5 p 



lr 



pzztc 



l^— #— p— ff_ r — 3_p ^_t^ # _ zjii 

bf^ b -j- -5- -£d p; f 

And now we see the fall - ing grain, the fall - ing grain, 

Our hopes of peace are all in vain, are all in vain, 

So let us sing the glad re-frain, the glad re-frain, 

P p.*-:f: *- >. P P. 



!^F 



— I A — A A — A ^ h 



4 — 4 — 4 — 4 4 1 4_ r -4 4 4 m 4—. 

— — — — ==p=i=b=t:^=rf=b=:=3 



u — b" . 

£>• 5 1 . You prom-ised, Lord, Yoa promised, Lord, you'd come a -gain, you'dcome a-gain, 
k ^ ~~ , _ .Fi ne. 




b f 

Come, Prince of Peace and reign. come and reign. 

k P P 15= P P 



3= X : 




Come, Prince of Peace and reign,. 
Come, Prince of Peace, come and reign, 

y P C= P V p- -F-. . 



L-T U I! — = 



_*. 



Z£*;.+-4 



5Eg=E?-^ 



foDyrieht, 1945. by J«ra»« D. Vuchan. Music Publisher, in "Honored Guest." 



Come, Prince of Peace 




plain; 

-•- 

t: 



— r i — I 1 1 . 



Softly and Tenderly 

pp s Very slow. m K 



No. 43. 

W. L. T. 

pp K Ve?-y sZow 



Will L. Thompson 



-v- -*- - - - - .^i. ^ > , v- 

1. Soft-ly and ten-der-ly, Je-sus is call-ing, Call-ing for you and for me; 

2. Whyshonldwe tar-ry when Je-sus is pleading, Pleadingforyouandfor me; 

3. Time is now fleeting, the mo-ments are passing, Pass-ing from you and fromme; 

4. Oh, for the won-der-fullove He has promised, Promised for you and for me; 

— v, A* — A — A — A 1 A — A — A — r**—*— -*—£t-± — P-rr-TB-i 

U l> P P P ^^ P P 



;fe^=3=*=* 



£=k 



-♦- ^ -«- -♦- 



s^aES 



£ 



£=£=!tf 



1 • ■• * 



.^_^_-_ 



■*<- 



See on the por-tals He's waiting and watching, Watching for you and for me. 
Why should we lin-ger and heed not His mercies, Mercies for you andfor me? 
Shadows are gath-er-ing, death beds are com-ing, Comingforyou andfor me. 
Tho' we have sinned, Ho has mer-cy and par-don, Pardon for you andfor me. 



s-c A-= — A A — A 1 A A * r* — ± — * A^— 4 — g-r- A' A 1 

r^ ,■ fe h & H-^^Tr, P^trrc » mo d 




Come home, come home, Ye who are wea-ry come home; 

Comehome, come home, 

-«- / -«- -#^ -•- -f- -»- -*- -»- p tt\ I9\ ' 



§^EE^^^" k^^^|^M^& 




Ear-nest-ly,ten-der-ly Je-sus is call-ing, Call-ing sin-ner, comehome. 



PC A^ — A A A 1 A A A i-A A 1 -—* A *-— w— r A-=— A ri 

U p P P P P ^^^p P P tr-^ I -I 



No. 44. 

Mrs. Evie Gray 



1 Want to Live With Him 



Houston L. Thomas 



Ft 



&*=***+ 



ri£=±:: 



FP=t 



&~: 



3fctris=: 
X ST 



3=w 



=t5" 



3^==£=faz 



1. Sometimes my load is heav-y and so hard to bear, to bear, 

2. Sometimes the road is darkened and I can- not see, can't see, 

3. Sometimes I'm sad and seems 1 can-not reach my goal, my goal, 

, — -ft— ft 1- £"— -f— *— ,>— K— *— ►— ►— K- r J-^J — J— . 

W g»4:-^^-F-— h F g^ P^— I- J f pk fc ■* fc * It- PP — ^ 



te 



r4~ 



:=t 



i=ra;= 






L — — a — i* — ■*— 



I go to heav-en, I'll un-load it there, up there, 



But when 

But when I'm safe in heav-en, darkness all will flee, will flee; 

But then I'm glad when Jp-suscomesto bless my soul, my soul; 






:|: 



N N "tor- 



g=t==F=F= :p=P=P=^=t=t: 






mm 

ii i * i I 

My Lord, I know, will roll my bur-dens all a - way , a - way , 

For this I know my Lord will roll the clouds a - way, a - way , 

One thing I know, if I am true to Him al-way,al-way, 

i i 

-»■ -0- 



— p= t-t 



-F*=l=--F=^ 



t-^ 






A K k -r»— 



p-p-p— p— r— r> 



D. S. But this I know for Je - sus 




i 1— H-n 



can watch and pray, and pray, 
Fine. 



£=Fq=^ 






z=|== 



day. 



r 



That's why I want to go to live with Him some hap - py 

And I shall en - ter in to live with Him some 

He'll take me to that home to live with Him some glad and hap-py glo-ry day. 



>- 









And He will take me home to live with Him some 
Chorus. 



-■ — i 1— 



H 




¥"■ ♦- t .-a— ^— a— «— ra ■ . < .- J 



r 

Sometimes I'm blue, when thru this sin - ful world I roam, 

Sometimes I'm blue sad -ly roam, 

f ' " P" • — , :f-_-p_:f I. k — k — ►__>_►_►_ r *— ^ — ft—, 

►» — __ c — 14 — ^ — rj-Prs — * — * — *— pi — i — i — i — i — i — pi* — a — & — -i 

c c ^h — h — h — h — I — 1— r % W £- 3 



Trmnr- 

CoDyrleht. 1945. by James D. Vaanhsn, Music Publisher, to "BlisBfal Showers." 



FT 



I Want to Live With Him 



D.S. 



CAi 



e=?s 



9&* 



3t=2 



'-A- 



^^a=^53El==! 






*=a 



3= 



r: 



With dear ones gone, it seems I have no earth-ly home; 

With dear ones gone. earth-ly home, 
-*- ■•- -#• 







££ 



No. 45. What a Friend We Have in Jesus 

JOSEPH SCRIVEN 

_l h h. 



& 



rfe=fe 



■fr- 



it 



Charles C. Converse. 



-fr 



w=^. 



3&t 



* 



i 

1. What a Friend we have in Je - sus, All our sins and griefs to bear! 

2. Have we tri-als and temp - ta - tions? Is there trou-ble an - y -where? 

3. Are we weak and heav - y la - den, Cumbered with a load of care? 



SS 



t— fc— t 



P=t=£ 



*=t 



^ 



P P u =P — P 1 



=p— i p u= £ 



^s 



fe 



i h n n h 



3 



i 






it 



■^ 



^ 



What a priv - i - lege to car - ry Ev - : 
We should nev-er be dis - cour-aged, Take 
Pre-cious Sav-iour still our Eef - uge, Take 



ry-thing to God in pray'r! 
it to the Lord in pray'r! 
it to the Lord in pray'r! 



i 



=£=£ 



fc=£ 



£ 



1 



£=* 



£=£= 



: p — y— > 



"p t> P D u~ 



^^feS 



ft E fr 



si 



2 



-lr-3— * 



as 



O what peace we of - 
Can we find a friend 
Do thy friends despise, 



I 



£= 



:£=£ 



ten for - feit, what need-less pain we bear, 
so faith -ful Who will all our sor-rows share? 
for-sake thee? Take it to the Lord in pray'r; 
I IN . 



> -fr 



14 >> _ 



¥= 



=5= 



£S 



~u P P t> D" 

-! r» r> h . h - 



i=fc 



i 



PIP 



^ 



not car - ry 

'ry weak-ness, 
and shield thee; 



i 



All be-cause we do 
Je - sus knows our ev - 
In His arms He'll take 



£i=£ 



t—tr-r 



-P— P— P^b>=£ 



-^- 



1 — r 



Ev- 'ry-thing to God in pray'r! 
Take it to the Lord in pray'r. 
Thou wilt find a sol - ace there. 



i B p p E 5 



Jesus Is The Light 



No. 46. 

J. M. M. J. Monroe Mobbs 



t — 5i^_^_c H — q — a — m — a 1 — « — 0- 

r -♦- -♦- -♦- -♦■ -♦- -♦- «_'- -♦■- 



a:=s= 



=t 



ffi! 



T* 



1. "lis a glo - ri-ous thougkt to kno w, when thru death's si- lent stream we must go, 

2. Oh, this won-der-ful light of love,com-ing to us from Hea-ven a -bove, 
3 Some sweet day it will not be long, we shall all join that Heav-en-ly throng, 



__ A — ±— . ± * — A — *— rl 1 1 1 * — A— ■ 






There will be a light shin-ing from Heav-en's e - ter-nal shore; 
Is our bless-ed Re - deem-er and Sav ■ iour whom we a - dore; 
When they gath-er a - round the bright beau-ti -ful throne to sing; 

A A rli A A A A A — A A A A rm A— =-— . 

ig-hrfc-j 1 — hu — u — h — " — H — ~ m — ' |~ ' * — I r* — — »"~1 



— Lh> lj ^ # * * # _L" — ■ ■ — a a ^_J 



. It will make the way oh, so bright, till we shall see no darkness of night, 
He will take a - way all our fear, all the way home He'll comfort and cheer, 
Oh, that won -der -ful glo -ry day, with the dark clouds all van-isheda-way, 

r> h * -#- ^ r> ^ i ► >- .*- *. 

7-c A A — r A A A A A A A A *-H 1 1— 1 A *— ■ 

eyes and no more sad heart rend-ing 



D.S. Where there'll be no more tear 



1 J J R 



-« ^- c * S H = * 



fez=ts=^=^tL=l: 



Fine 



1 



And we'll sail a - way o - ver the nv - er to die no more. 
As we sail a - way o - ver the riv - er to Heav-en's shore. 
We will set - tie down o- ver in glo - ry with Christ our King. 
-A— *-f$ -£—± ;*,;==*,:=*=*=*— :r-»~rjP 




There to- geth-er we'll live and 
Chorus 



hap - py for - ev - er - more. 




_ § 



He's the light shin-ing thru-out the tur • bu- lent night, 

Je-sus tru - ly is heav-en's 

h 1 h *| I .v.*- >. -K -K 

s — a — H — — B 1 1 1— — H ' r 1 F- 



Copyright, 1445, by Jhhss D. Vaaghan, Music Publisher. In "Honored Guest." 




Jesus Is The Light 

— &_ 



a a — CJ # # ■ B ■ #— »-r^ ^- L ,»--rkr-* D 



Mak-ing bright-er the way to 



that beaa- ti • ful shin-ing shore; 



ar 




No. 47. Tell It Every Where You Go 

James Rov/e. YV. B. Walbert. 



m . r ' S 



£=& 



S 3 9 



5 



3 



t/ -i- » " . . . . p 7D [7 * ■ 

1. Je - sus saves from sin, mak-ethpurewith-in, Sal -va-tion free He doth be-stow; 

2. Je - sus keeps the true, leads them safe-ly thra,Andhidesthemev-er from the foe; 

3. There are mansions bright in a world of light, For all who do His will be -low; 

n r> r> 



£ 



y=p= 



-"£--£- 



§ 



=P=£= 



-*— - f- 



±±z 



V V 



jh^l 



^-^— j- 



a 



fc^EE^EE* 



-*-^ 



tell it ev-'ry -where you go. 

tell it ev-'ry -where you go. 

tell it ev-'ry-whereyou go, 

& D P II 



All will be re-ceivedand of guilt re-lieved, So 
Cheers them on their way to the land of day, So 
And for - ev - er there they the crown shall wear, So 



I 



t: 



2=5= 



-*- — f- 



■¥- 



Chorus. 



=3= 



-<a— 



3|= 



■&*- 



Oh, tell it out, And 

Oh, tell it out and sing it out, 



L L 1 T 

•* M h k- 



y u u 

let the weak and way-ward know; 

IN l\ IS 

-Si. 



£=£: 



P P U- 



S 



£ 






Oh, sing and shout, And 

Oh,sweet-ly sing and glad- ly shout, 



tell it ev-'ry-where you go. 



* D r> 



- 



W. B. Walbert. owner, 1920. 



No. 48. 

M.J. 



I'm Going Up To Glory 

Spiritual. 



-fc- 



i 






=^=^=15: 



=&-£ 



U P 



Malcom Jones 



S 



1. This world with all it's sin and shame has lost its charms for me, Like Lot of old the 

2. DearLord, in this oldworld be-low I have no one but you, To helpmeo'erthe 

3. The rich-es of the whole wide world can't bay my fu-ture homejAl-tho'I'm poor and 

P P " P P P ~^~ F 




-Ji- 






is: 



33 



£=S 



=&= 



^ 



1/ -#- 

righteous, to the mountains I would flee: There is so much of wick-ed-ness,most 
roughway, and to show me what to do; But some sweet day I'll un-der-stand and 
need-y of - ten tempt-ed here toroam;It makes me hap-py just to know I'll 






% I k Fine 

P P 

ev -'ry-where I find, 1 want to go to glo - ry and leave it all be-hind. 



know the rea-son why, When I get up to 
be a mill-ion - aire When I get o - ver 



glo ■ 
yon 



ry my home be -yond the sky. 
der in glo-ry land so fair. 



a— K h 



-k-= k 



tr- D— p— P 






*=t=dz 



-i — 
■fr- 



:p^=^=fc=|cz^ 



P U y f - 



Chorus 



D.S. Andl'll be there for -ev -er, with Him I shall a-bide. 



^__^_^_ i ^_. 45: 



... s g •- :J j- 

ry land, to my home be-yond the blue, Gon-na 

- 



I'm 



go - ing up to glo 

^ b p ppp?r 



:fe==^ 



he saint -ed old prophets too; Go 



have 



•- -•- -•- -•- - - - j 

a lit - tie talk with Je-sus,with the saint -ed old prophets too; Gon-na 
. -•- -»- hv . . -»- -•-* -•■ 

,♦ 1» [» » fr 1 » j- 



Eg 



Cooyrieh u 1945. by James D. Vauithsn, Music Publisher. in"Honored Goost'. 



I'm Going Up To Glory 



D.S. 






walk all o 

-A- -A- -A- .A- -A- 



ver that heav-en - ly place with the Sav - ior by my side, 



$=£ 



fc r — i & — S — a— Pi 1 h 



tr-T 



^ 



p 



tr~ tr-tr— r-f 



No. 49. 

J. D. V. 



God Shall Wipe All Tears Away 



James d. vaughan 



& 



±=£=$=$ 



$X 



r — r 



** 



=t 



it 



=t 



S— J ♦ *- = tP = -P 



=fe 



il 



ffr r^ — f f pf 

1. Here we have a time of sor ■ row, Pain and anguish day by day; 

2. Weeping eyes shall weep no long - er, Peace and joy shall last for aye; 

3. At the bed-side of the dy - ing, To the weeping gent-ly say; 

j — rf- 



v*-p- — ? ttit — 

: » = F^-=i- — — Ee=B=w= 



f= 






iH^H i 



*F 



1 



■ • o H * 



=£=--. 



=fc 



t — r 



rrffr— r 



^i— <-^ 



l 



But there'll come a time of glad-ness, 

In that E- den land up yon - der, "God shall wipe all tears a -way. 

That in heav'n there is no sor - row, 



ru 



1 



S£ 



£E 



■P—P- 



££ 



*—?—?- 



r r 



tt= 



fc& 



Chorus. 
-fr- 



ft h Ft 



Sa=fc BE3E3ES 



KSE 



=£ 



* 



set 



J2 



■& — & — 



r 

Praise the Lord, how sweet the prom- ise, As we trav 

-±i -A- -A- -*- -4- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

: — r r v r r t - yF r*-r r r f 

p TP , A^-A^ Z fc k A jg=Efc |ZS=± JAZ—|A te= 

- — ---■- -^ J u l 



el day by day; 



& 



:«2=£ 



q P U 



i 19 fa 1 

i 1 -■ — l-i 



u-4>--s-y 



t= 



i 



W *-: * w _i ■£. 4 — I 1 * S 5— 



=31 



=3 



L 2^ 



gg rt> — te 



That in heav'n there'll be no sor -row, "Godshall wipe 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A 5 - -A- -A- 

■#* F E £— Is is— rbr &s r h- 



all tears a - way. 



fcS=E 



fc= 



P- — -P- — P- — fc k — rzs-. n 



E 



3 =g=p=tz=£ 






Copyright, Renewal 1942, James D. Vanghan owner. 



*=f=f*= 



No. 50. 

G.D.McN. 



Tell Out The Story 



G ."D. McNair 



l.Tell out the sto - ry of won-der-ful love, Tell of the Sav-iour 
2. Tell oat themes-sage of Jo -seph's new tomb, Where He was bur-ied 
3. Tell of His ris - ing and go - ing a - bove, Tell of His com-ing 

A A A A A^ J A^ A^ . 

— j A A A — i-A A 1* r A A A A ff — 

-4-ii. — a — A — A — A — *— Fh EEES — r* ~ r * ~ — 9— : 




and keep look-ing a-bove;TellhowHe suf-feredon darkCal-va ry, 
mid the dark-ness of gloom; Tell it with glad-ness wher-ev ■ er you go, 
back thru won-der -ful Iove;Com-ing to car - ry His chil - dren a - way, 



s- = A- r -= a A <?>- r A—A A— f-A A m A— 

c — y- L - p — i — jp 



-p— t— p— p— r 



15=* 



h i h 



• ■ ■ — n — ^ — ^ — t* — s — ,^_ 



— i— I 

Bleeding and dy - ing there for you and for me. 
How His sal - va - tion mak-eth whit - er than snow 
Broth-er, get read- y for that glo - ri - ous day. 



3 g =^ j J> h. 

■A 

3= 



■M A ^ 1 

Tell out the sto -ry, 



m 



6 



■Ht=H^ 



7 1__' — r 



r- l p- 



-# — » — i — » — 
-i — — i — i — 

-|A |A A A 



-p— P~ tr- 



k-^jLJi 



!z=z=z=bd=±=i=fc=b=: ff=c=:hc=zi=d: 



:^=iz^: 



: S- 



broth-er, tell it to-day, go tell it, How Je - sus suf -fered,andwas 



=6 






F 



■A- 



.|A A- 

■p— r 






tr- p— p 






tt 



==tj=3 



l &— - & — K- 



-M A ^ 1 *~ 






•ar-ried a -way to glo - ry; Tell of His com-ing, sing the hap-py re. 

-p= 5=^=p = 



S-u-p — i — i * — _ ~ zc — — — 

— p — i — p p — p — p p— r— p- 

Copyright. 1945. by Jirnoa D. Vnnihmn. Music Pnbllaher, in "Honored Guest. 



p=F^ : 




Tell Out The Story 

— g— ri^-j— ^-^— -t; M— : M~ 

- le - lu - jah, Je -sua is com-ing,He iscom-ing a -gain. 



^— =1 g=: 






• — # — P- — 



r- 



No. 51. 

HENRY H. TlLSON. 



Lead Me Shepherd 



James D. Vaughan. 






'i — J — 5 £ 



=t^ 



s 



75^ 

1. Lead me through the fields of sun-shine, And the pas -tures green; 

2. Lead me, Shep-herd, through the val • leys, Lest I go a -stray; 

3. Lead me through the night's grim shad-ows, To the per - feet dawn; 

i 



gfcfczfa s: 



:t 



* 



:t= 



a 



£— £ 



t: 



P^s= 






t 



15=^=^: 



Zj=i-— 5 



On Thy arms of love and mer - cy, Let me ev - er lean. 
Lead me, kind - ly Shep-herd, lead me, To the per -feet day. 
Of the day to which we're hast- 'ning, Lead me kind - ly on. 






%*t=t 



S—,4- 



-I — p — ' 



ii^igiS 



l§ 



Chorus. 



:=]: 



b£ 



i 



i 

Lead me, lead me, 

Lead me, lead me, gent - ly lead me, 



.1 A 4 LV^ 1 



frr^ r 



Thou bless -ed One; 



MS 



j — i — h 



:t=t 



fc« 



=j: 



:=t 



^ 



3 



=t 



\y-&- 

V. — £N_ 



Is: 



r 



5 



Lead me, lead me, Lead me gent - ly on. 

Lead me, lead me, ev - er lead me, 

? £ T f — rg— :g— t^-f— £— J— >_ «. 






t=t 



James D. Vaughan. owner, 1924. 



fc= 



No. 52. Be Faithful And Endure 

Rev. Dr. Alfred Barratt 



J. C. Cooper 



w^^mmmm^^ 



*=*= 



*± 1=3= 



1. wea - ry heart be Dot dis-mayed with sorrow sore- lyvexed,Look nn -to God, be 

2. When dark af- f lic-tions crowd your life, and lights are burning low .When days are filled with 

3. Be brave and trne and nev-er fear, keep in the nar- row'way,What tho' the night be 









not a-fraid,no long-er be perplexed; He watches with His sleep-less eye, His 
toil and strife and nights are filled with woe;Tmst in the Lord with all thy might and 
dark and drear 'twill end in cloudless day;When clothed with strength and grace di -?ine, His 



-A- 



:t=t==i=5 



PE£Ei=3^^^z=3=g^E^^zzrfE3=3=5=^: 



word is ev - er sure, In time of need the Lord is nigh, 

thoushaltbe se- cure, Press onward in the path of right, be faithful and en-dure 

prom-is -es are sure, The vie- to- ry at last isthine, 

-A- -A- -A- A -A- -A A- -A- A- A- -A- -A- -A- -A- IN N 

■B— I 1 1 ■ F*-l H 1 1 1 

%— k k k k Ik — \s— r-k — k k k 

^=J=P=P=0=^fe=^=P =^: 






D. S. Un- til you join the ransomed throng, 

hf-i trtn* ^- 3=l: b— u— b— b— r tr d 



tr-rT 

andcour-age wea-ry broth-er, press a -long, with 

With strength each day, wea-ry broth - er, press a -long, 



=g= gEfr 



-A- -A- 



A- -A 






1= 



^IrP^ 



E2 



*it 



1 1 



£ 



it 



-*-=£- 



M — ■ — jfc 3 — E BB" — j — j — ^" t^ 

r l b b r b b b b r w> 

joy keep sing-ing _ a glad and hap - py song; Look 

with joy and sing a glad and hap -py song; 



h3=p 



E-frr 



=fe 



-h F tr™ -!■ =1 ■- 



E^J-E-lzg: 



-F- -A- • 

l=*=b====~ 



Copyright. 1945, by James D. Vanjrhan. Masic Publisher, In "Honored Guest. 1 



Be Faithful And Endure 



ti 



D.S. 



ap 



Look up 



to 



£=fc=W 



=tE 



V 



±± 



-W — ■— 20! 

v — 



Je-sus, ev - er keep your ac- tionspure, 

I pray, keep your ac - tionspure, 

— ?- 




No. 53. I Shall Be At Home With Jesus 

JENNIE WILSON. JAMES D. VAUGHAN. 

With feeling. 



i 



ate 



-h 



-M . 1 B 



■h 



% 



± 



feM 



v 



.\ i rl 



3 



S 



5 



-j-*v 



0- -o>- 



1. Years of time are swift-ly pass - ing, Bring-ing near - er heav - en's goal; 

2. Aft - er all the days of wait - ing, For His voice to bid me come, 

3. Aft - er leav-ing earth-ly pathways, Which my wea-ry feet have pressed, 

4. Aft - er last fare-wells are spok-en, I shall meet dear ones I've known, 



^ 



* 



£=£ 



^— ^^ 



22 



TIZ2 



^P=£ 



w± 



* £^Z± 



f — m— y- 



w m^ — « m m 1 - — LH_ 



£ 



fN. I g 



zaz~: 



Soon I'll be at home with Je - sus, 
I shall walk be-side my Sav-iour, 
I shall stray by life's fair riv - er, 
In the pres-ence of our Sav-iour, 



While e - ter - nal a - ges roll. 
'Mid bright scenes where an-gels roam. 
Find - ing ho - ly peace and rest. 
When we stand be - fore His throne. 



■&- 



w 



t — I- 



2z 






-U 9 9 b- 



i 



I 1/ U 
Chorus. 



W* 1 



i 



-fVr-h 



5^ 



l/-\ I ^ 



s= 



-S4^ 



T^ 



4 



1 — tr~P ~ 

O how pre-cious is the prom - ise, 

-g*T fr E ^ f 






That with glad-ness fills my 

,tf t Jit 



soul! 



^ 



P B B E J 



j U — U — Uj- 



jse 



£=£ 



P=£ 



I gg E a |4 x i t i j i 



h h 



s^ 



V\|Tyr 



fe=£ 



~i it tr 

I shall be at home with Je - sus, 



While e - ter - nal a - ges rollJ 



@ 



SfeJ 



>=^ 



^ 



-^- f- , f- * 

-£ b 'b 



-^^- 

£ 



-4t=- 



=P=5= 



-Afr^-H 



COPYEIGHT, 1908, BT JAMES D. VAtTGHAM'; 



No. 54. Oh, What A Happy Day 



C. L. H. 



m 



i 



m 



m 



G L. Hamilton 



£313=**= 



**=} 



■—# 



1. When my work is done and the crown is won, I shall go . toheav-en'sshore; 

2. Moth-er dear is there in theCit • y fair, Waiting at the gate for me; 

3. What a joy 'twill be there for you and me, Meeting loved ones on the shore; 



EBzipjEHEi— kEEzgEE 



i i r r»j 



s 



t*-i^ 



:t=t=t=p=P=tt=t=t 



m 



T=t 



• W— L H ^ 9 •— L 4» P * 4 =— L # « W— I — I h* 

-♦- nw -♦- ' W • ^ -^ -*- 



There to sing God's praise thru e - ter-nal days, And His ho - ly name a- dore. 
When up there we meet and each oth-er greet, We will have a ju -bi - lee. 
Glo • ry bells will ring and we all shall sing To the Lord for ev-er-more. 
I 



fei^Siifi^gi^# 




e£-£e£e£ 






1 



0, what a day 



that day will be, 



what a day 



fe 



a 



-*1— 5- 



==E=|£: 



Tf 



that day will be, 

=|sz=^z=|s=ts=: 

b P U U 



P— h— r -h, — I .• ff h — c ffv — <s> - 1 



When we get home, 



ffiEBE 



BE 



When we get home, 



P ^ P y^T 

and loved ones see; 

and loved ones see; 



•3 — g- 



» # — h ■__!>_ 



{5=^=^=^=^ 



*=« 



- v^ 



-* — t 






CF- 



i 



P v \> y~r 
We'llshoutand sing np - on the shore, 

We'll shout andsing up - on the shore, 



jp^^^ H ^c g i * m i ffi H 



U f f 1/ 

Copyright. 1946. by James D. Viochan. Music Publisher. Id "Honored Guest.' 



Oh, What A Happy Day 



BSE 



BS 



And praise the King 



M^Nee^ 



\> I) C l> I 



§gH 



for ev - er - more. 
And praise the King for ev - er-more, 

. . N IS ^ „ N I 
-♦- -♦- -♦- -i— -r- -♦- -•- -•- 

1 A — a. 1 1 1_. 



No. 55. Keep My Hand in Thine 



James Rowe 



G. Kieffer Vaughan 



GsSr 



^S 



=t 



cs; 



£ 



3t- -*-ESr— 3 



1. Keep my hand in Thine dear Sav-iour, Walk 

2. Whenthestormis sweep-ing o'er me, And 

3. When I reach the si - lent riv - er, Tho' 

4. Till I see Thee in Thy glo - ry 5 Till 

I 14 - '1 P& 



be - side me day 

the path I fail 

my faith be ver 

I meet Thee face 



^ 



^=tt=p; 



— * — £ — FS — a — E^ — & — F*^ — * — f- 







For the foe is near me ev - er, Tempting me to go a - stray. 

Know-ing Lord,what lies be - fore me, Let me feel Thee close to me. 

And the foe our hearts woald sev • er, Stay with me and com - fort speak. 

Where the an -gels sing Thy Bta - ry,Sav -iour, keepme by thy grace. 

P ^ -ts>- -»- -•- -•- -m hv 

JE=p.d£— i: 



sz^±^^rtezz{==i:=t=FS^^=*==i==Ffc=^=yp==!t=FP2rz=3 



.Chorus. 



£=^r 



-^- — =< a| I— -j ^ 51 ^ *=- — 3 — -si +IZZJ1 



Keep my hand in Thine dear Sav-iour, From Thy side I would not roam; 

■#■ -»- -•- -»- _ -P- -#- •- J5>- 



SE 



£ 



:t=t=t= 



^=N= 



■I — Fa 



:t: 



£— r~ 



t==t— t=c 



Kp^ 1— 1- ah— 2 iJ- 1 ^— FJ si ah— Ps— hg— I — h — 1— F^jtH 



■zsb± 



Walk be - side me, cheer and guide me, Till I reach my home sweet home 






it: 



-&- 



£=£: 



c [z y y_C| p — p — h 



:t= 



Copyright .1945 by Jamea D. Vauffhao. Music Publisher. in " Honored Gn est. 



No. 56. 

Pvt. E. N. E. 



Closer to My Lord 



Pvt. Ernest N. Edwards 
(Written while riding in an army bomber, May 31, 1944.) 



BEfa — i-s^ r-i-F ^— *— 2— ii— ii— 3- ^f-y-j-Fg— g- 1 ^— 3— 4H 

1. While trav-el-ing thru God's won-der-ful air, in the blue sky up there some-where, 

2. While fly-ing a-bovethe riv-ers and rills, o -ver the mountainsand the hills, 

3. When all of this strife for- ev- er is ' er, and the great war-birds flv no more, 






&—-*>— 6 



-A— A 4— -lk A A : 



M^fe^J 



:=ft 



lit - tie clos - er, 

lit - tie clos - er, Just 

lit - tie clos - er, 



a lit - tie clos - er to my 





— 3 — 3 — 3 J 3 



I see the old earth in beau - ty be - low, 

Lord, my bless - ed Lord; The sight of it all is thrill- ing to me, 

Then Je - sus will safe - ly pi - lot me thru, 

D.S. — When I shall get home some won- der - ful day, 



M 



«= 



just as He made it 
Je - sus in all, I 
to that good land be - 

=— f — fc £"— > — ►- 

5 — ft- — * * — h 1 — 

p— p- 

in that good land I'll 

■ g - — ■ — -J P— j— 



^ 






^zzirfb— i 



long a - go, And get a lit - tie clos - er, 
clear -ly see, And get a lit - tie clos - er, 
yond the blue, I'll get a lit - tie /clos - er, 



5=£z 



T^ 



3 S : 




J- » — - j — * — fiiFr — 



live for aye, And get a lit - tie clos - er, 
Fine. Chorus. 



3; 



^ 



to my Lord. I get a lit - tie 



Just a lit - tie clos - er to my Lord, my bless- ed Lord. 



.p. .0. 

— m — K- —1 1 1— 



Copyright, 1946. by James D. VarjBhan, Music Pablisb 



t ,* J5 J» < h < h J! _ 



Closer to My Lord 






clos-er to my Lord, Yes, just a lit - tie 

Just a lit - tie clos - er to my Lord, 

-A. .A-i 

B S*^ It * A 2 £ ^J pes A A* * = 

- sg-r — a— a— a— a— n— r x .., — Rg— a— n n. i 



?: 









- ft— ft-j t 



D.5. 



=£ 



*=:& 



3E 






& 



ft 



v P UM $ [) p y p J, 

clos • er to my Lord; 

Just a lit - tie clos - er to my Lord, my bless - ed Lord; 

^r-g =5=5 — I — fr=!l=gz= tn=p = f ^ 



E^ft 



P=^ : 



£ 



No. 57. 

Fanny J. Crosby. 
h 1 



Near the Cross 



te 



— v— t; 

W. H. DOANE 



1 



F 



r* 



:1: 



311=5; 



^ 



1. Je - sua keep me near the cross 1 There a pre - cious foun- tain, 

2. Near the cross, a trem-bling soul, Love and mer - cy found me; 

3. Near the cross! Lamb of God, Bring the scenes be - fore me; 

4. Near the cross I'll watch and wait, Hop - ing, trust - ing ev - er; 



g-ft-E- 



ffi 



£3 



s 



v — r 



-i- 



E 






Fink 



1 — t- — r 



Y- 



b I 1- : 



j=±J ^ H L fe ^ 



L ► 



Free to all a heal -ing stream, FlowedfromCalv'ry'smoun- tain. 

There the bright and Morn-ing Star Sheds its beams a -round me. 

Help me walk from day to day, With its shad-ows o'er me. 

Till I reach the gold - en gate, Just be - yond the riv - er. 

" f f ►. 



!=L~l S :i=rr^==*=N=fe=|=E| 
— b 1 1? — f 



E 



D.S.Till my rap-tured soul shall find Rest be -yond the riv - er. 
Chorus. is i rs D.S. 



i 



i 



1 



* 



£r 



In the cross, in the cross, Be 
-A- -A^ -A- 



^ 



--- 



1= 



■I* u 



my 

■A- 



glo - ry ev 



er; 



i=£ 



t=l= 



No. 58. Smile Your Troubles Away 



L. 0. B. 



L. 0. Brock 



ffH^-d 



-r-^- 



4=s=:=j=:=i— :==^=s=: 



sfet 



1. When the load is heav-y as you trav - el on each day, my brother, 

2. When the road is dark and you can hard - ly see your way, keep smiling, 

3. When the cloiids are press-ing heav -y down up - on your soul, be - liev-ing, 

-A- -A- -±- -*- -A- -4- -A- .•*•** 

| 1 1 1 9 — I r # m * -■■ i =1 — S 



m 



p ' p 



1 



'^=k=|c=|g=|g — |g — {g=lg=|s 



i>$ 



£ 



*. 



P~ P~ P^ - P~ p 4 



fv 



T 






Have a talk with Je - sus, He will help you onyourway to heaven; 

He will light the path-way, lead- ing to e - ter -nal day up yonder; 

Look a - way to Je - sus, and just let Him have con-trol, He loves you; 

-A- -a- -a- 3a- -P*- -P- *- -a- - 1 X 




^ : 



He's a Friend and broth - er, al -ways ten -der kind and true, look up and 
If you have been saved from sin, and heav - en is your goal, my brother 
Tell Him all a - bout your tri - als, He will un -der-stand and help you 

NIX 

-A- -A- ~Jk- -A - -A* -* - — *-- — A —a— --A-- **- 

r — r— r- 



B-|s— k U U k 



"^— r 



MyyiEE 



; p P" 



|=^=fe 



I 



)— • * Mm — 1 rA • Fh -i ! — ., i_i_izz~: 



He will sure - ly see you thrn. 
Smile a - way your troub-les, keep the glo - ry in your soul. 

lead you to the glo - ry land. So keep on 

b K) i n p 

TiP -*- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -,*- -A- -A- - mx 

e K__K_^_e_ p _y_^- tr - 



IT 



eS 



•*=*=£ 



*=£=?= 



•j-p — p- 

Keep on smil - ing, joy to oth - ers bring, 

Broth- er, keep on smil - ing, it will joy to oth -ers bring, and keep on 

smil _ - ing, 

n -*- • n. -*- -a- p l ^ 



j*_bV 



2-A- 



1 u — 

Copyright. 1945, by James D. Vanehan. Moeic Poblisber. Id "Honored Gaest." 



-pr 



Smile Your Troubles Away 






Keep onsinging, let the joy bells ring; Look a r way to 

sing-ing,sweetlysinging,ev-er let the joy bells ring with gladness; 
Sing - ' - s ing, 









Je-sus andiust let Him ha?e His way ,And smile a-way your troub • les to-day. 

your troubles to - day . 



--*--*--*• -*- -A- -A- -A- "*- J N JN fr«i * J 



7-iH f — i 1 — r 1 1 1 — t — t — sa — r g — a — a — a — c # 



59 



B. & 



We'll Give Him Glory 



Barber Edwards. 




ft 



1= 



it 



^3 



:-F2: ftl 1 fS 



a 



1. When eve - ning shadows soft - ly fall Up - on our path-way here; 

2. When days are bright and health is good, When we've so much to do, 

3. Oh, let us not for -get my friend, Thru Him we dai - ly live; 

» £ d. a a A life a * A Lk a ^ — it ^ 1 1 ]- 



SL. 



S 



A 



Fine. 



^fc4J4 Jqjj^^ 



$= 



2fc 



How oft - en then, do we re - call Our Saviour's love so dear. 

Oh, do we thank Him as we should, For bless -ings all so true? 

So let our thanks eachday as - cend, All hon - or to Him give. 

A- A A -^-» 



m=£ 



=-br- 



tr t- r 



— h- 1 1 ■ 



*= 



t: 



D. S. Oh, hal- le - lu - jah! hal - le - lu - jah! Let us shout and sing. 
Chorus. 






i 



D.fl. 



JBE 



^-^ 



^=2 



With thank -ful hearts, we'll give the glo - ry on - to Christ our King; 

£ -^ ft £ * * J* **£ £*:£ * OTrheav "' n fr ia, « 



§ 



iM 



r f f- ,r fc ¥ 



COFTEIGHT, 19 3 7, BARBEB EDWAEDS AND JAMBS D. YATTGHAN', OWIfEBS. 



No. 60. 

J. B. H. 



The Army of My I^ord 



(Spiritual) 



Jesse B. Hardin 



1 



:$=*=? 



JEE3=5=ii£=£ 



f££ 



ffl-^-A A 1* 1* 1 A It A— fri — l-S A]— ^— --H ^- 

eP^— p 1 — r~0 trtr- iP*~ c — a ~ — — 

1. There'n a might-y ar-my,great and grand, marching o - ver this old troubled land, 
2.1 am in the serv-ice of my King,prais-es un-toHim I dai-ly sing, 
3. If you want to do the best you can, you will try to help some fall -en man, 



• * * * -P~ * -*- *> -^" "k- "■*' • k " "•*■ -*- "■** "fc- -^" A 



Don't you want to join the ar-my of my Lord, the bless-ed Lord of glo-ry; 



■-* — # _p_# — ^_ # _f— # — -1— pfc — & — b-i— &— =t3 — n 

-i 1 1 1 ♦ — i 1 1 « -P H— -j— ?« — . — -P 

LA LA. LA. LA A. LA. LA. LA M 3? .A. H I 3 AJ 



r-r-rrir 



b2=^2^s=S=iEEf_E^EJ 



£=fc 



v v v L, 

He'll de -liv- er you and make you free, give to you a life of vic-to-ry, 
You can help a -long this glo-ry way, help to win the bat- tie day by day, 
You can lend to them a help-inghand,pointthemto the bet- ter, promised land, 



5*4==fczfc=t 



fc*=fc 



$— 1 ~ ir~ $— p— p— p =p~ £ 






^— p— b— b-p-p— p— p: 



=*=£=* 



-Aj A g — 1-3^1^ - 



Fine 



Don't you want to join the ar-my of my Lord, my bless - ed Lord? 

• a • ** • -P- ♦ -ff- *■ «U «T -J -J i 



Chorus. 



By — h — MS — h5 — ^N — -P — a- — ^ 1 — a 1 — "— \- A*- 1 

£) * .|. .J_ ^. - # -j- .:,- » -^ » -=,. .^ T 

Oh, don't you want to join the ar-my of my Lord. 

Don't you want to join the might-y ar-my, 






-A .. 

£— : 






-A A- 

-0- 



Copyrig-ht. 1946. by Jumos D. Vtag-kan, MurIc Publisher, in " Blissful Showers. 



\> V V 



The Army of My Lord 






Oh, don't you want to join the ar-my of my Lord? 

Don't you want to join the Saviour's mighty ar-my? 




UMAA^Ali j 



./k — 



-»--F — h — F — • — • — F- 



-i (-#-— it — k — r — • — m — p — h — 

£=E5-^fc=p=5- 5 -t2=g= 

D.S. 



1 



14 ft 4 |4 4 14 14 *— ft- FS A ^^-i S 4j _P_ 4j 4_J 



U U U 



You hadbet-ter get with Him to -day, bet -ter sign you up with-out de-lay, 
, * • * * -F- • •»=- ^ -F- -k- -k- -k- -k- -k- -k- -k- -k- A 

|=S=2=S-S=te=|— ^=i^=fs=Fl===t=:=t=l==t==-l=t==^=f. 



:b=b=b=b=t2=b— tr=^=t=fe=fe=ifc=K=t=p=t=:g=t- : 



-b— ^J-fcJ-fcJ-tr-tr-tr 



:t2=tzz: 



No. 61. 



I Need the Prayers 



'and pray one for another . . . The effectual fervent prayer of a righteous 
J. D. V. manavaileth much" James 5: 16. James D. Vaughan. 



With feeling. 



M* 



w 



■fi-fr-fr 



£=?=P=3F 



paEiM=H=z^^^J F H^ 



=t 



1. I need the prayers of those I love, While trav'lingo'erlife'sruggedway, That 

2. I need the prayers of those I love, To help me in each try -ing hour, To 
3.1 want my friends to pray for me, To hold me up on wings of faith, That 



s 



£ 



=£=££ 



feS: 



£ 



t 



:t 



£=&— c i) =g=g =M=F t F 



: »—»— te 



±C=6c 



8 



rf, 



V V 1/ 

Fine Chorus 



^ 



e j a^ ^p^^iiB^ 



.*• * - * j. + ^ 

I may true and faithful be, And live for Je-sus ev-'ryday. 

bear my tempted soul to Him , That He may keep me by His po w 'r . I want my friends to 

I may walk the narrow way, Kept by our Father's glorious grace. 



s 



i££ 



=(=££ 



fetEEEHEE 



£*=£ 



£s 



: D~Ti~P " 



-M-f-t>-U-4Mt=t 



IJEZIZZr^fr— fr~fc 



I 1/ v v v v 
D. S. — I need the prayers of those I love. 




±=fc£ 



£ 



D.S. 



t nr P 



^^^^m 



pray for me , To bear my 



feE* 



& 



EEEt 



soul a-bove,And in-ter-cedewithGodfor me; 

-A* -A- _ -A- -A- 



£ 



-p -r-^ 



£ 



I 



fc= 



y - \) i > i> 



r- — cs — * — i* — m — it — »- — ik — at — i ■ 



Copyright. 1936, by Junes D. Vaoehao, Benewal. 



No. 62. We'll Wear A Shining Crown 

W. J. S. Wyatt J. Smith 






1. We will sing glad hal - le -lu- jahswiththean -gels some sweet day, When we 

2. It will be a day of glo -ry in that hap -py home a - bove, When the 

3. There will be no sin nor sor-row when we reach that hap-py place, And we 

^-— --A— A- r A ■ r A — A A— -k n 

frX-LjA.-] 1 U# # • 1 0— \-\ 1 -0 • 1 

— — i — i — ~ — a— a—^ — i— -H- — i — ^— h* — * — * — * — * r ~fc — ft — 

reach that land of glo -ry by and by;Hearts of love will be re - joic-ing,wheii we 
mil- lions of the" Lord bf - gin to sing; With our voic- es sweetly blend-ed sing- ing 
nev ■ cr - more shall take the part-ing hand; But we'll live up there for - ev - er look- ing 



A_A._A_»— A— A— =— A- r f^--A » A , 

— trtrt?"t r ^^~tr-tr- t - 



Ete£ 



-► — K 






-> — I — A — A — h« — * — ♦ ^ — d — « — ir H ~\ 



1T-P 

all get home to stay, Praising Je - sus our Ke-deem-er in the sky. 
songs of per-fect love Un - to Him who reigns for- ev -er, Lord and King. 
on the Saviour'sface,Sing-ing prais - es un - to Him in glo-ry land. 






. Chorus. 



&=&=$ 



z^zfer 



^i¥m 



-r 



b 

We will be so hap-py 

We will be so hap-py, by 

Oh, we'll be 

-X-r-b — k — & — b 






and by, 



with heav - y 



-9~- — Fa— *—£ — £ — a-Fa — * — P V 



: t=^ 




[) V V k I 
bur - dens all laid down; 

With our heav-y bur - dens, with our bur - den9 all laid down; 
With our bur - dens all laid down; And 

S ari ■; =£:— b—B : 



::£=£=£=£= 



r 



j — -* • q 



CooFrisrht. 1945. by Jo 



i D. Vtaghan. Marie Publisher. In "Honored GnORt. 



We'll Wear A Shining Crown 




np~D' 



v V v d p ^ l> 

When we get to teav-en, We'll wear a 

When we get to heav-en, get to heav-en in the sky, 
when we all shall get to heav- en, 

IN N iN rs a -k- 

d i 4 aL_ a a *-'—£— ,£'— , 



ifcr- 



3=^: 






#r=r= 


"^ h h= 


— h- 


-h 


: ^. H 


9 u D p 


— * * 
— k — k — k — 
b \> U 


— ■— 
— ^ — 


— ^ — 


t — — k — fc — a 

? r ^ u r 


bright 


and 


shin 


- ing crown. 


We will wear 


a bright and 


shin 


- ing crown, a shin - ing crown. 


We will 


wear a 


shin 


- ing crown. 


rs is r\ 
-•- -•- -»- 


-*- -m- -•- 


-»- 
— i — 
— #— 


z^^^zzJLju^ 


M>— l 1 — 


y — ^- 


— W- 


— p— 


:t- rj 



No. 63, 

Elisha A. Hoffman 






Glory To His Name 



J. H. STOCKTOM 

IN 



q 



-•— 






i^nt 



-t. 



11^ 



1. Downat the cross where my Saviour died, Down where for cleansing from sin I cried; 
2.1 am so won-drous-lysared from sin, Je-sus sosweet-ly a-bides with-in; 

3. Oh! precious fountain that sares from sin! I am so glad I have entered in; 

4. Come to this fountain so rich and sweet, Cast thy poor soul at the Sa?ioor's feet; 



*r^fc— ^ i 7 'a r£— m- 




There to my heart wasthebloodap-plied, 
Thereat the cross where He took me in, Glo-ry 
There Je-sus saves me andkeeps me clean, 
Plunge in to-day and be made complete, 



to His name. Glo-ry to His 



* — m— i r~ * — * 

^=E^fk^=S=t=i 

tzztzbfcz^E&zfct 




No. 64. The Eye That's Watching You 

Chas. W. V. Chas. W. Vaughan 



p^m^^ mt^m^ 



1. There is an Bye now watch-ing you and see - ing all yon do, A- 

2. This Eye is al - ways look -ing in, to see the good or ill, With- 

3. Re - mem -ber that this Eye can see in - to your heart my friend, Oh, 



-*— r 



iO^sEE^i^i 



<* — r A m <*—^ 



^-v~~t>- 



v—p 



:":Et2=t2^t2=t2=*^=^=: 



-14 

V 







-\ — i — i — 
■3— *— 3-* 

long the way as day by day your jour-ney you pur-sue; The things you do, the 
in each life where sin is rife, and thus Its mis-sion fill; What-e'er may come, it 
let it see your heart is clean, when life for you shall end ; Just fol- low Christ a- 



n. \y * — » — — — I 1 1 1 — 

— 4 4 14 4 A 14 4 K— 



=*=n 



-P P A A f-- A -| 



=P=P= 






words yousay, are all Te-cord-ed true, So care-ful be, the Eye will see, for 
is the same, this Eye is al-ways there To see and know the way you go, if 
long the way from earth to heav-en fair, And then you'll be e- t6r-nal - ly, with 



- , p_J*bp_t2_t2_U— t 



tr-tr 



*=*=;=*: 






Chorus. 



N k OHORUS. 
friR — 4 4 1 ^ 4 — |-l 4 -4 — h^l 

rf — * — »i — * — * — «i— c ,l* — $) — ^— L ^. 



M ~ 4 



=£=: 



-^ « 3 



It is watch-ing you. There is an Eye now watching 

it be dark or fair. There is an Eye now watching 

Him and millions there. 

,._4>_-£_4_,__- 




-A A 






■B ■ 1 1 P 

.J 4 4 14 14 u_ 

— tr-ts-f-p-f 






I 



you. so mind the course that you pur- 

you, 'tis watch-ing you, So mind the course that you pur- 



/— ,J N -»— 4- 



Copyright, 1945. by James D, Vaujrhan. Manic Publish 



Honored Guest." 



The Eye That's Watching You 

s j 1 1 — I — j — ■ — - m — m 1 1 — \—\ 1 — 

fc — E i ♦ — ^~ <^~ai~ I— ^— *— *— ^— ^— c ^— 3- 



sue; 

sue, that you pur-sue; 



Be care-ful what you do or say and live for Je - sua 



C=p=t2= P=pZ= 



-ifc- 



tr-^-rtr-r-D 



-I F — # — I 

HP 



s=s 



-«= 



££ 



y y 



H ^ A A W * A ± A 1 * ~ ■& • * 



ev-' ry day, There is an Eye 



now watchiugyou. 



s 



itp=£ 



There is an Eye now watching you. 'tis watching yon. 

£ -|f- jf- J 






^=^=F^ 



£=^ 



No. ^65. 

Rev. J. H. S. 




Only Trust Him 



r 



r 



Rev. J. H. Stockton 



=t 



=t 



r 



r~* 



£=H=: 



* — 



1. Come,ev - 'ry soul by sin oppressed, There's mer -cy with the Lord; 

2. For Je - sus shed His pre -cious blood, Bichbless-ings to be -stow; 

3. Yes, Je - bus is the Truth, the way That leads you in - to rest; 

4. Come, then, and join this ho - ly band And on to glo - ry go; 



lEt 






t=t=tt=tr 



3E= 



t= 



ft 



r 



±tz: 
Fine 



1 



3— *— F*— j — * — *— Ei 



*=*=« 



IE 



And He will sure-ly give you rest, By trust -ing in His word. 

Plnngenow in - to the crim - son flood That wash -es white as snow. 

Be-lieve in Him with -out de - lay, And you are ful - ly blest. 

To dwell in that ce - les - tial land,Wherejovs im-mor-tal flow. 



t= 






:t: 



H* L l— 



:t 




D.S. — He will save you, He will save you, He will save yon now. 
.„ Chords. D.S. 



*t=£ 



3t 



r 



r 



=&=sj=fc 



*-? 






Pf 



r 



HI 



On • ly trust Him, on - ly trust Him, On - ly trust Him now; 

=r± L — 4- tir^j— $=& 
t3=H U— fcr=fr=j=|— t — I I : I ; 

— L ... I i A! Al 1 



^= £ =^"' 



ji=t=d==q 



No. 66. 

C.T. 



Sing A Little Sunshine Song 

Curtis Taylor 



5E3ES! 



*=& 



hz 



$ 



5C 



b£z^ __i) ^ .j:zdhd. 



m. 



tTTt 



1. If the cloads hang o - ver you, as you jour-ney here, Sing 

2. If your heart is sad and lone, skies no long-er blue, 

3. Je-sus will your bur-dens bear, on the jour-ney home,Sing a lit -tie 

H it— rh K ♦ 



r»—A-$ it it 1 ' 1 1* — r^ h ♦ 1 ' ri< 

K-4H* F F F F * * — hi 1 1 ' e2s— H 



rt 



--$ 



.-I- 



jgi^^^p^fe 



a lit - tie sun-shine song; 
sun-shine song, a lit - tie sun-shine song, a hap - py sun-shine song my 

}.— F F $ 1 i it — -k — -i 



■tr-tr 



fl 



£=:£: 



=zzzzzfa=zt5: 



3E2 



5=S 



^ 



5_j_ J 



ft— ^U 



£=3=5EE3d 



•• 



God will lead you safe - ly thru, fill your heart with cheer, 
broth - erj Je - sus loves His ver - y own, and will care for you, 
And will all your sor-rows share when you cease to roam. 




-I- 



£=st 



D.S. Give the world a sun - ny smile as you press a - long. 



* M M" 






u P y 



*=±± 



b b b I 

Sing a lit - tie sunshine song, 

Sing a lit - tie sun-shine song, a hap - py 

— -F- — K ,Ej ft ft ft 

- _yj ji { pi ft 1 14 1 1- 1 1 F* . 

Fine Chorus. 
r 4 



g~P - 

ZlZZdoC aZZZa* — a. 



liiing 



P' p f ~ "? b d 

sun-shine song. Sing a lit - tie sun - shine 

Sing a lit - tie sun-shine song, 

-ry— ^ f g rt- t f j» a - t 1» t — » ^ 

Copyrisht. 1MB. by James D. Vmosh.D. Mnslc Publisher in "Honored Gaeat." 



V— 1 



Sing A Little SunShine Song 



&=\ 



2ZZZS1 



v V VVb u 



song, Sing 

a hap - py sun-shine song to oth - ers ,Sing a lit - tie snn- shine 



F=£=£=i=j =t=t 



^=P=P=I 






*H£ 



- =^=E=5=g= 



F-r-r-blzfcfcg 



k — 1 — £ — £ — p-= — p— 
_ __ p— p- 



a lit - tie sun-shine song, 
song, a hap-py sun-shine song, mj brother; 

-0- -*- -*-_te±.__ *&z -j X 

No. 67. Thou Thinkest Lord, of Me 



E. S. L. 



E. S. Lorenz 




£=d==Sq=fe 



m 



=t 



f>-1r 



:§!=*: 



-*— *— — 



* 



-^- -^- -^- 



* 



r u . 

mid the tri-als which I meet, A -mid the thorns that pierce my feet, 
cares of life come thronging fast, TJp- on my soul their shad- ows cast, 
shadows come, let shad-ows go, Let life be bright or dark with woe, 

rs js i i rs w 

ti=z±=£=d=z & — f— g — g=Ci=g=g=:s=aa=:j?: 



:Jz=rg=g=g 
K0 — a — 



p=zp: 



-» — — i- 



r~T~rn 

U A A— 1 



« 



FlNE. 



fe=i 



4=t 



eS 



t£±5=3 



"CI" 



a 



One tho't re- mains su - preme-Iy sweet, 

Theirgloom re -minds my heart at last, Thou think-est, Lord, of 

I am con -tent, for this I know, 



^ 



me. 



i^n 



I* 



t= =t2=t2==4==t= 



t: 



:t 



D.S. What need I 

.Chorus 



L t? 1? 1" 



fc~ "* — g ' 



H? 



^3 



£=P 



3 



1 



fear when Thou art near, And think- est, Lord, of me? 



fc ^_ H ^_ > ^ prz: F lz==z=j= ^-^-J — i 
1 r D - ' I I 



=* 



Thou thinkest, Lord, of me, (of me, )Thon thinkest, Lord, of me, (of me,) 

* * -^" A "*E- -k" ■*- -»=" - -f" "f- -f~ •?• -f- -t- 

• » — • — •— r* » » •— hb b 



t 



:U=p=t:=fc= 



P=^ 



— p-h- 



r 1 - 



No. 68. I'm Walking In The Narrow Way 

Paul Hayes White - Vernon McReynolds 



£=^=£ 



W4 ' — M— 



-4-* *L 

1 X 



-fv 



-« •— ah 



:^= 



-=1— S- 



^ 



b b b b n b 

1. I'm walk-ing in the nar - row way, . . 

2. As herewith him I walk a -long,.. 

3. When I have reached the close of day 



b b 



4^=^ 

:!=== 



-a — « «_ -« « a. 

V V V V 



te£=£=ffc 



•j 



=* 



3t 



£ 



b 1/ 



i^iN^f! 



i s 



♦- -♦- -♦- -♦- 1 1 

b b b b p 

With Christmy King from day 

My heart is filled with hap - 

I want to hear Him sweet - 

— * A a 



b 

to day;. 

py song;. 

ly say;.. 



-fc 



b b * 



%B 




:b=b=^p=t=J 



— r* :r-^^ j- — 1 

• <. 1 — 9 — L (S- 



M 



His hand of love ...is hold - ing me,, 

I sing it as we on - ward go, 

"Well done" my Son, come rest with me, 



^— s- 



^E&¥^^ 



. * — * — A — A — .. 



8 



fe£ 










£rf 



. Li j_ 



-f ah— 1 ; F3 -= : 2— • I 

-rt—^h "-.• — » — P— ^ — -• -* 



Fine 



9& 



v v * * ■*> bbbbb 

And keeps me oh, so glad and free, so glad and free. 

The praise of him who loves me so, who loves me so. 

At home, thru all e - ter - ni ty, e-ter - ni -ty, 

.,. . F . ... _m. ... ... n p f f ^ 



■3— s- 



D. S.-The bless-ed home 
Chorus. 



BE|3E|^^«= 



A- 



IHHI 




land of the soul, (home of the soul.) 



e 9 — 1___ _r. — . — .q.__^_ # _3 

I'm walk -ing in the nar -row way, 

I'm walk-ing in the nar - row way, 



n r> r- 



p r> 



_ g .a, _ A — A P-r* * P ^ — * — 1 



Copyright. 1945. by James D. Vaairhan. M 



Publisher, in "Honored Guest.** 



V 



I'm Walking In The Narrow Way 



p 



K y w . 1/ W 



And Je - sus walks with me each day; 
And Je - sus walks with me each day, with me each day; 



trtr 





r h r> u n ^ 


gyrfrt? . 


irfiNV- : t^P-^-#=^ 


q . L__3_iL__^_ t :__. i;_j — : l_g_izi 

He leads me on to heav - en's goal 




1 h h h l< -. /- h IS k h 

i -«,_ .«_ .»_ .^ s n h s .1 ' 

r A A— A P-r* A K -P *— T 


*w i f^— 


J- — -t'.l'-j^fj- — ?---A 


$ p ' » 


p i ^ -V 



No. 69. 

P. P. B. 



Almost Persuaded 



fiT* 



£: 



_j 1 \ 



P. P. Bliss. 

P- 






^J± 



«fc 



3 



3r 



1. "Al-most per-suad-ed" now to be - Iieve; "Al-most per-suad-ed' : 

2. "Al-most per-suad-ed, "come, come to - day; "Al-most per-suad-ed" 

3. "Al-most per -suad-ed,"har- vest is past; "Al-most per-suad-ed" 

I i _h j i_^ -(*- f. ^V J I h j I 

ii- J ai — rir- jj i ^— | 1 r*^— fcg l il- J — ^— rafr— jv- 



BE 



^^ 



i= 



t=t= 



t 



-4- 



JV 



$=± 



ini 



d: 



3fc 



3=£ 



■*■ 



Christ to re - ceive: Seems now some soul to say, "Go Spir - it, 

turn not a - way; Je - sus in - vites you here; An -gels are 

doomcomes at last; "Al - most can- not a - vail;"Al-most"is 

-n i IN I -F- 






:t 



f= 



t==t= 



^A_ 



ffl) A A- 5 — \-&- A A \-A 



-1 p— 



ip—u 



"v 



3 



go Thy way, Some more con-ven-ient day, On 
fin-g'ring near, Prayers rise from hearts so dear; 
but to fail; Sad, sad, that bit - ter wail,"Al 

, f- A ft jQp 

w=t — p- 



"b p 



f-^P" 



d=: 



;*- 



Thee I'll call, 
wan-d'rer come! 
most but lost." 



-»- 



£ 






N<>. 70. I Am Leaving For That New World 

L. 0. B. L. 0. Brock 



Jk&A-* — * — * — n ' — *i — =r — P-r* — * — * — " — ^ ! 1 '— tn— 



1. There's an-oth -er world they say that's bet- ter far than this, 'Tis a land of 
2.1 have heard that flow'rsnp there are blooming all the time, Send-ing out their 
3. And they say that Je-sus is theEul- er in that land, Ev - 'ry-thing in 

A A A A_A_A_ - A A A A 

'&-£-<* A 1* A A A A— A— VQ &— H U - b^ — r-A— A A A 




z£=(fc 






peaceful Iiv- ing , filled with joy andbliss; Andtheysay in that fair country, 
sweetest fragrance o - verthatfairclime; And the bells all o - ver heav-en 
that fair country, tru - ly He hath planned; That is why I'mget- tingread-y 



A A A A-t-s = = * K? r A A A A A A_ A- 




noth-ing goes a - miss, I 
sweet-ly ring and chime, 
for the meet-ing grand, 



S — k — ! 1 1- 






i 

6= 



am leav-ing for 

I am leav -ing, I am leav -ing for 

ft ft ' & I* 

AL AL AL «L 



JtJJJJ 

g=g=g= = — .E 



fet 



■et=^ 



:t===3! 



Chorus. 



:5z=rzz:±iz=:«z=:5 = 5==S==f==?==S 



that new world' 
that new world. 

J 
1 - 



When 



my work 









When for Je - sus, work -ing here on 



*j in 



P 




^=b= 






-* «_ CL 

V V P 
earth is done, At the set - ting of the 

earth forme is done, At thelong a-wait-ed set -ting of life's eie-ning 

I I it i I n r> f\ rs 

AJ A' - AL_ A] . Aj AJ« a A- 

S rfr-c — g — E* — h — i — Fh — h — * — f — F — h — h - 






Copyright. 194S. by Janes D. Vaaghan. Masic Publisher, in "Honored Gaeet. 



t3- 



I Am Leaving For That New World 

— jr -S-H-r-^— ft-d ^— h fr-^f-1 



eun; 

sun, I'm leaving; 



Go-ing where there is no night, Where the Sav-iour is the Light, 



iS 



P F 



-A — A — A — A — A 
=t==t=t=t==l 

— JUu 



z±=p=P=£zzgE3-pE^zzf 




tr-r- 



I ^ am leav-ing for that new world. 

I "am leav-ing I am leav-ing for that new world. 

^ A— A— ^£" F 



> 



:^=P=^: 



:p: 




Fill Me Now 



^S- 



1— 



John R. Sweeney 






T 

1. Hov - er o'er me, Ho - ly Spir - it, Bathe my trembling heart and brow; 

2. Thou canst fill me, gra-cious Spir - it, Tho' I can -not tell Thee how; 
3.1 am weak-nes3,iull of weak-ness, At Thy Sa-cred feet I bow; 
4. Gleaase and com -fort, bless and save me,Bathe,0 bathe my heart and brow; 



Ife 



£ 






s. 



=? 



■ iAf j& i* 14- 



• -ft- -g- -M- -g- -F- -P- 



4—4- 



Fine 



l EfejJEEgEEfEE^^ 



I 



i=* 



5 



I 



Fill me 
Bnt I 

Blest di - 
Thou art 



with Thy 
need Thee 
vine, e ■ 
com -fort 



hal-lowedpres' 

,great-ly need 

ter - nal Spir 

ing and sav' 



-*- 



A A 



D.S.-FU1 me with Thy nal-lowedpres-ence,Come,0 come, and fill 



•enc8,Come,0 come, and 
Thee,Come,0 come, and 
- it, Fill with pow'r,and 
■ ing, Thou art sweet - ly 

*■ "& r£- # f - 



-in- 



fill 
fill 
fill 
fill- 






5J 7&i 

me now. 
me now. 
me now. 
ing now. 
_« — isa-_ 



me now. 

:1 1 



w = $r% 



- 1— ■+ 



_!- 



E 



-4- 



^ 



s 



Fm me 



i^ 



now, fill me now, 
■J 



•j^.g 



^ 



e 



E 



j* ;<: 



£* 



je - sns, come, and fill 
J- -S- -£- 



i 



£ 






me now; 



^^ 



No. 72. Blessed Consolation 

Pfc. L. W. (Written at Homestead Army Air field, Homestead, Fla.) Pfc. Lawson Walker 

yq — | h _l . — ^\-ir — i — |-^- r 






+ 






1. When we leave this earth-ly life be - low, When we tell our loved <mes good- 

2. Fa - therwill be there to wel-come os, Moth-er dear will greet us once 

3. Glo - ry be to God for - ev -er-more, We'll be re - u - nit - ed a- 



!£#*= 



I P P P 






I Ui 1 — i 



^ 



-P-t?A- 



A- 



t=U=t2=trf 



^0 



Steiel 



^Hgi^P^-kS 



*W 






£=:£ 



±>U 






-U 



32^=r 



by, When our bod-ies lie in cold-ness, On the Lord we can re - 

more, Yes, we'll meet our brothers, sis - ters, On that hap - py gold - en 

gain, With the Sav-iour and His an -gels We shall ev-er live and 
-fV- . -„ . _ _ 

-i- 




--rA-r* 1 — » — * — a— r i *— rA*- thA^-i — : — r — r 

z=bteiEtz = h = h = h = Et=:t = Efcz:3 = t=zEf±ztzF 



«J ^ -♦- -5- ^ fay- -&^ t 



b 

ly; If we have lived a life for Je-sus, He will be our Guide and 
shore; With sorrows we have known all end- ed, Christ will take us by the 
reign; With sep - a-ra -tion gone for - ev - er' We shall ev -er hap - py 

A— r±* — m A * — r* 



-m rfr . V fTr . ' I A ~ A — r-A A — :r-i 

gg§^EE£=p=«— t=E= E=§fc 

_^=t==El=z±^z|s=:£=^ = Efc=ls=E^ 
P P P I I I 



pSe 



-It- 



-fee- 



P 



-40-I- 



-£<s>- J &^- 



Ba3^ffi£ 



T 



*=* 



F 3 






-" M i 



stay, And the road toheav'nwill o-pep wide, Bring-ing in the 

hand, Give to us a hap -py welcomethere, Wel-come to the 

be, Sing-ing hap-py songs to Christ our King, Thru-out all e- 

-^-f-,-P-^r-A- — M A A — rh- A — i-A A T§Afq ~: P~ 



Twr-' 



Chorus. 



f 









— g — 



judgement day. 
prom-ised land, 
ter - ni - ty. 



What a hap - py day 'twill be, 

glad day 'twill be, 






M P l> P P I I 



Copyright, 1945, b» Junes D. V»aeh»n. Music Poblinhcr. in "Honored Ggnt." 



Blessed Consolation 




r - f i v 

When our loved ones there we see; On the glo-ry 

there shall see; 

..£ ■—=£—» «— r— * r* ♦ * *- 



-I- 



=t2=ta= 



i ~r— t^=jg 



t~ 






£=£ 



E — P — P=£ 



-^— ff W j P— j ■— h2SJT S 

^_tg # __^Z=B= i p_^_t - _ 



shore to part no more, Thru-out all e - ter - ni - ty. 






t 



- \>*p DA — r* 



:t= 






-PH 



— g ■ b — r ■ g ^5 — 



-h 



t=tZE 



No. 73. 

JAMES ROWS. 



Gathering Buds 



JAMES D. VAUGHAN. 



fcfc 




.Ht 1 



4=£ 



=t 



— P^ 



#■ 



•s>- 



1. Je - sus has tak - en a beau -ti - ful bud, Out of our gar-den of love, 

2. Full blooming flowers a-lonewill not do, Some must be jonng and un-grown; 

3. Fa-thers and mothers, weep not or be sad, Still on the Saviour re - ly; 

4. Blooming in beau-ty in heav-entheyare s Bloomingforyouandforme; 
-P — P — s P — s-rk — k — N— ss — rs— ■=—*— ±~ *— P- r {Z^(2- 



:tt=REEE 



fide 



4i i i 



Be 



H 



f- p 



tt 



EE 



-j — \-&*—£>—A 
4_L!_w 1 



i 



Fine. 



s 



iS 



=c 



Borne it a -way to the 
So the frail buds He is 
You shall be-hold them a- 
Fol - low the Lord, tko' the 

P — * — P 



rTf 



« 



-a- -3- -«- 

cit - y of God, Home of the an-gels a - bbve. 
gath-er - ing too , Beau-ti - ful gems for His throne, 
gain, and beglad,Beau-ti-fulflowers on high. 

cit - y be far, Till our bright blossoms we see. 

_fc h m k a 



FFr 



'*=$— ^— i 



■#- 



:{g=g 



Ft 



^ 



D. S. Je - sus is gath-er-ing, 

Chorus. 
n 



ii i 

day af - ter day, Buds for the pal-ace of heav'n. 



D.S. 



m 



3 



=tt» 



rr 



* 



r 



•<?• 



§s 



a 



Gath - er - ing buds, gath - er - ing buds, Won-der -ful care will be giv'n; 



i::is: 



l-l UM 1 1- 



James D, V aughao owner. Benewal, 1921. 



m 



No. 74. Trust in The Lord And Keep Sweet 

Rev. Johnson Oatman, Jr. Rev. Morris G. Lee 



-i 1 -5 — • — * — — 

-» — 1» — forf — » *? 1 



3 — z 4-^ — d— F-P — -1 — «t ' ! 1 — h»- 

1. As you walk in the high-way of Je - sus your King, Ma-ny 

2. Ma-ny foes you will meet ev - 'ry step of the way, But you 

3. Till you stand on the banks of the Jor-dan at last, Till its 










tri 

need 
wa 



Se^ 



i. I) c ~ * * 

als you will meet, yes you will meet: But you may be just as 
not meet de-feat, not meet defeat; And it will help you a 
ters bathe jour feet, they bathe jonr feet; When by the dark clouds of 

— |j — i — =\ — U 1 1 — J=i 1 1 E 




- py as song-birds in spring 
lot as you Strug -gle each day, 
trou-ble your sky is o'er - cast, 



you trust 









in the Lord, 



ft — * — * 

: E t=P=rf— 



,FF^— ^-p— j: 



Chorus. 



*=* 



f • — ^ — i 1 -■ — i • — « — 



and keep sweet. If you trust in the Lord and beep 

and keep sweet, and then keep sweet. 

h r> r r> I :*: st at * 

-fci k — r J d — -1 * J — rP *- rf P &« P L-_4__ 



Pg5=F=E=FA^ 



p-J^-3 S 3 ) * « — f* * — 1U '♦ I— lH — Fd V 1 1 1 

1 C^ 1 IJ1 p *" §2_CS 5=2 w -j 

sweet ev-'ry day, Have abrightsmile for all whomyoumeet on the way; 

-*- ■*■ Tir -«V- -*- [*) 

— r:_ e f f f f. j — P— ft* — * — fi— hi— r&-fc — i — *— i 



Copyright, 1945. by Jamcu D. Vaughan, Music Pabliahor, Id "Honored Gaest." 



Trust in The Lord And Keep Sweet 



rfr—h : 



=i 



- ... . 5 _ j. 

Then ev - 'ry shad-ow will flee 



\m= 






-+-j- 



V 



-V- 



and a bless -ing you'll be, 

-a- 



izd 



£ 



m^E^ 



tit: 



m 



:2^===i 



=fr 



v 



— r 



i) 



=± 



t — £ a — — s — l ^^ — 

and keep sweet. 



I 



If you trust 

in the Lord and keep sweet, and then keep sweet. 

i J> m- ? ^ r> d i 



# — ■ — •- 



No. 75. I Hear Thy Welcome Voice 



U. H. 



Rev. l. hartsough. 






to 



* 



3 



§F 



r- 



T 



w 1 ~ • p 

1. I hear Thy welcome yoics, That calls me, Lord, to Thee, For cleansing in Thy 

2. Tho' com-ing weak and vile, Thou dost my strength assure, Thou dost my vileness 
3.'Tis Je - sus calls me on, To per-fect faith and love, To perfect hope, and 



b 



& 






:2: 



=P=£=£ 



T 



f=P=£ 



W=£ 



I 
t) 



Chorus. 



id 



IeH^ 



it 



±3: 



-ft- 



$ 



*=* 



precious blood That flowed on Cal-va - ry. 

ful - ly cleanse, Till spot-less all and pure. 

peace, and trust, For earth andheav'na-bove. 



£ 



mir-b- 



Zrf- 



$=&#*=* 



I am com-ing, Lord! Coming 

-A- -A- -A- -tSt 2 - -* 1 

— f- r ■ T r- i 1r g if' * - 



HI 



=P=P= 



£_ 
£=£=¥ 



S= 



'i d p i7 



te 

s «- 



: F=Ff 



=t 



:$=£ 



:-: 



4=* 



tr 



e?^ 



^ 



-rSsI 



now to Thee! Wash me, cleanse me in the blood That flowed on Cal - va - ry ! 



fe j-p u . JE 



E 



I 



^z^: 



tr- irtr 



K 



No. 76. 

Herbert Buf fum 



If the Bible Is True 



:s333e£e£ 



-fe — K^-M — M — M 



£=:*« 



Adger M. Pace 






1. If the Bi -ble is true, there is heav-en to gain, And a place that's called 

2. If the Bi -ble is true, sin is real, and it came Back in E - den when 

3. If the Bi-ble is true, then pro- vi -sion was made To the soul thru its 

4. But there's no "if" a-boutit, we knowit is true. And we build all our 

— 7= r * * A A A A— r-A A A A A A — r * [ 1 



bPppPPPpPPpi 



^rf=45=^5= 



— r ^--S/w-:— v-v- c ?— ^— ^— ^— ^— ^-^— it—. — 



m* 



hell to shun; If the Bi - ble is true we can on - ly be 

Ad - am fell; If the Bi-ble is true then we'll have to be - 

sin - ning dead; That the seed of the wom-an in due time should 

hopes there on; It will stand when the heav-ens roll up as a 

F F P F — r-A A A— 

g U jg U h» ■ ■ — 



£-*- 



-b£ t * « 

I » — I 



rtLzitc 



Chorus. 






:*: 



the Bi 

the Bi - ble is 



"J -«- " H*~ 

saved from our sins thru Christ Je - sus the Son. 
lieve That re -pent-ance a - lone, saves from hell. 
come, And should last - ing- ly bruise Sa -tan ! shead. 
scroll, Andthis earth with its works are all gone. 

_ -*- -•- — ^—"s 

_5 * — a a — r A — p — p — i F — a — r «-r — b — r* » — r* — * — * — 

P P P p P i/yix 



mm 



ble is true, I be -lieve it 

true, the Bi - ble is true, I be -lieve it is true, 

-F- -K- -k- -F- 
A — r- -A A A — r[ 1 1 1 

1 — fc« * 1 « 1 k— hk Ik k — ~k 



is 
I be 



las 



: h===^=^=p^=P=^ =t 






true, 'Tis as pre-cious as tho' it were new, were new;Wecan 

lieve it is true, We can 

l_i J _ -♦- -- _ A . 

—4 A A A A A — r * F 1 ) F — *— r* — ± — • — m — »— 

:zis=g=bz= g=:E P— P — g=g=gz=»z f — Ed — rf— Hz: 



Copyright. 194G by James D. Vaaarbtn. Mailc Fabliubcr. In " Honored Guest. " 



If the Bible Is True 



g±=* 



■+-$+—* 



__j J — ^ — _^j 



safe - ly trust all, for this Rock 

safe- ly trust all, yes safe - ly trust all, for this Rock can - not 



K? 



I*— k— K— E 



AjLt-* "t 



IJ J !J I IV fj \J IV I 



F 



3t= 



5 ^ — ; — J EE gi -* — ■ — ■ 



V 



# » 9 \ -a 



s s S 1 -, H— — , 






ft -♦• 



can -not fall, Ev-'ry-thingin the oldBookis true, 

fall, this Rock can-not fall, is true, 



-fc— I 

-■ J- 



* A— H- A A A A A— r-A A A A— 5 ^— r- 



No. 77. 

James Nicholson 



Whiter Than Snow 



S2 a a Lj — m — e—i-0 — 

v -4- -9- 






0— si — h® 



=t 






zt=t 



Wm. G. Fischer 



41 — « — ©— i-^: — j i-J 



* 



1. Lord, Je-sus, I want to be per-fect-Iy whole, I want Thee for- ev-er to 

2. Lord, Je-sus, look down from Thy throne in the skies, Andhelp me to make a com- 

3. Lord, Je-sus, for this I most humbly . en-treat, I wait,blessedLord,at Thy 

4. Lord, Je-suSjthouse- est I pa-tient-ly wait, Come now, and with-in me a 

I I . J. P J l 



§ U f To A' — r* — a s — r* * a — rm * m — 1 — 1 St — pS -a. »— r4r= — * — * — I 



«* 




=fc 



3 



-1- 



I^_ 



3t=: 



=E 



=fc 



J—O-r-U 



-B- 



^ (5 ^ 1 J L| 1- ^ = = -S2 L= = S L© 

live in my soul; Break down ey-'ry i - die, cast out ev-'ry foe, 
plete sac - ri - flee; I give up my -self, and what- ev - er I know, 
cru - ci - fled feet; By faith for my cleans - iDg I see Thy blood flow, 
new heart ere - ate; To those who have sought Thee, Thou nev-er saidst no, 




Now wash me and I shall be whiter than snow. Whiter than snow, yes, whiter than snow; 






^ 



» 



t=tc=t 



fssU=t=t= 



P 



No. 78. Marching Onward With The King 

Millard A. Glenn J. 0. Townsend 



t) 



'ii^ii^i^ 




1. We're a band of sol-diers marchhag on oar way To our home in 

2. We are march-ing dai - ly on - der His command, For the cause of 

3. Mid the storms and shad-ows we will march right on, Till we van-quish 

-A- -A- _ -»- -A- -s>- N 






t=t=t: 



:f: 



l=£=$=$=£z 






31 



?=&=* 






e/ w - - ^ ai 4i ai -- y p -p- 

glo - ry, in the land of day; And our hearts are hap - py as the 
righteousness we firm - ly stand; And we know that soon we'll reach the 
sin and shad-ows all are gone; And someday we'll reach the bright e- 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 



t^ 



-l— I— 



V 



FE 



-i — i — t-i — 



v=$ 



-Ifc — 

5 



jz^zzpz 



=i — fr -ji 



__J_ 

zsj: 



z4=F=J= 



■tiff — F * 1 K M- 

gg==£ zzzjzzz3 ==SF 

1 1 ^ r _ _^_.^__ 

birds i in May, 

glo - ry land, March-ing on -ward with the King, the King of glo -ry. 

ter - nal dawn, 



^Ptz£ 



-A- 



-A- tj>- 



£ft 



:£=£ 



-£— r~ ! 






3=3=3=. 



IJEeIeE &EEE^ 



Chorus. 



^Z^Zp|EfeEqZZEE|E~E^$Z?=*Z53 

UC^ZZj ZJ fi ^ s( — t_i g pg a; a, 9 m-J 

ZJJ& X g — LQ SI Li^p v * y — I 



We are marching on - ward, in the light di- 

We are march - ing, march-ing on -ward, in the gos - pel 

.A. .A- -»- -0. -A. 

E-w-t — i f- 1 H 1 1 1 — \-m — I 1 

#F^=E^^^EEgzzzEF=^=^^=t=— =*= 



-l — 1~ 



^^zzzzzzzzzz:Iz===zizzpzzzzzz^zz:"zzziz=5zzg 



vine, 

light di - vine, 



3: 



:§z 



g^ZZJjZZZkZZZJ^ZZEZZfZZ 



Go - ing home t» glo - ry, 
Go -ing home to live in glo-ry, 



r i H 

-k 

r. 



* — k k fP — 



P* 



^3 



Cotrilsht. 1946. by Juioi D. Vntbu. Hula Publisher, fan "Honored Goes*.' 



Marching Onward With The King 



£|SES^= 



s 



:E^5 



g 



?d?s: 



there with. Him to shine; Hap - py in His 

there with Him to bright-ly shine; Hap-py in His 



9V\>\ -r— ^r =^=F 



SEEEESEEj 



— hi- — p> — » — s — 



:t 









fcrfzz 



at= 



■fw 



M- 



EE^S5g===^E 



serv - ice, that is why we sing, Soon we'll 

ho - ly serv - ice , that is why we sing,wesmg, Soon we'llreach 

-A- -*- _ ,_ 9m- -m- _ -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

^= t-4 ^- ly~H^ 'I rP-fef ' 1^-L.l r 



^c^-F— i — i — 




nzis: 



z-^z=z=^sz== ^z=:[r==^ 



°j 



reach the por - tal, march - ing with the King. 

the pearl -y por - tal, rnarch-ing on -war* with the hea?'a-ly Xing 



. Kirk r Hi- 



-A- -A- 
t-Tf- 



tl==t=- 



ip=p=p: 



No. 79. 

A. REED. 



Holy Ghost With Light Divine 




— l-r-fc 



GOTTSCHALK. 



*^h| — an a • J-4r~ m w FfSH 



-a*- 




13 



4. Ho 



ly Spir - it, all di- vine, Dwell with -in this heart of mine; 



E-4- 



J _A 



A = ^ F=l = =^ =g [ : F : =^- B: 




-£ 



MH-i-^^ pd=J=P=1^fl 



mE 



b*=4-« ei 



s#* 



♦4-®—**- 






f 



-d>- 



Chase the shades of night a- way, Tura my dark-ness in -to day. 

Long hath sin with-out con-trol, Held do -nam -ion o'er my soul. 

Bid my ma - ny woes de - part, Heal my wound- ed, bleed- ing heart. 

Cast down ev - 'ry i • die throne, Reign su-preme, and reign a-loBe. 



J=L 



ajj? 



:t: 



F=^E 



-y A 



ff=P=F =*FF 



|5BgEgg§9 



No. 80. 

B.J. C. 



I Will Follow The Lord 



B. J. Clements 



l&^^^$ UUH?t$ 



1. Looking for a glad day to -morrow, thru this val- ley of sin and sorrow, 

2. When I'm wea-ry of all my tri-als,with my troubles and self -de-ni-als, 

3. O'er the mountain of sin I'm winging, of His won-der-ful love I'm singing, 

-A- A- -A- -A- 
-J— -r- -H- -■- g -J-- m q £ -■- -■- -■- -■- -■- 



fc£= 



eb* 



F3=&=*F 



mm 



sts± 



=^-N— ^ 



^ 



I will fol-low the Lord; 

I will fol-low the Lord, I will fol-low the Lord of glo-ry; 

T-lM-^-lr-fc-*- " -n 



-= ?-=F— F— t— 

SEfc=t2=lfc=tf= 



t2=ti^=t2=t2- 



=|s=aj_ 



=fex 

trtr^-tHP-tr-tr 



iiSil^^ii^S^I^PI 



£ 



I will fol-low where'er He leads me, in green pastures of love He feeds me, 
Tho' my dearest Companions grieveme,He will nev-er for-sake nor leave me, 
Some glad morning I'll see andknowHim, in thatCit-y my trophies show Bim, 

-A- -A- -A- -A- 






tr-tr-0-0— tr-tr-tr-tr-tr 




will fol-low 'the Lord; 



I will fol-low the Lord, the Sav-iour and Lord. 



Chorus. 




z3= M: 



A 1 * R A F — L ^ A 



P b 

will fol-low the Lord 



With gladness I will fo! - low the Lord, 

- N» -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 



I will fol-low the Lord, 



-ps.—^zk—\i—^: 



I 



^* 



fi m—V* — F — F — F. — F — F 



-=1— S- 



CoBSiielit, 1J15. by James D. Voachsn, Music Pablisber io "Honored Gaest." 



M_«_ 



=b=t=zfe=t=p= 
$ $ U 



Sr$^EEE 






I Will Follow The Lord 



of glo-ry, Where • so-ev-er He leads; 

Where-so- ev-er He leads, yes, where so-ev -er He leads, 



Se 



-■- -■- -■- -™- u, m m -w- -w -■- -r— 

-S M 1 1 1 1 1 — ^ — P r* — (•— L — U — a — l — 



-*r— g- 



P~ P t ^ 



-k__^_^_V^-k 



I'll keeptrusting His word, 



oh praise Himjl'il keeptrusting His word, 






7T 



a — P — h- c h: — F^ 1 h — y L l-r- h— rt— ti— h~t— J 



I'll keep trusting His word, 
— fc — fc — k — k— ^ — >c 

U \> $ $ l> [> 



And glad-ly feed 



weer-ev -er He feeds. 
And for -ev-er I'll feed wher-ev-erHe feeds 



j-EE 



g r— §" 



P— P- 

:E=t: 



-P-*- 



:£ £ nl- 



* <g - B - ,d 



:A-: 



No. 81. Jesus, Saviour, Pilot Me 

Rev. Edward Hopper ' . 



A-P 



J. E. Gould 

FINS 



£=« 



:fe£ 



A 1 1 1- 

. n ran » .'- 



*=F=tq 



1. Je - sus, Sav-iour, pi - lot me, - ver life's tsm- pest- eoug sea; 

2. As a moth-er stills her child, Thou canst hush the o - cean wild; 
S. When at last I near the shore, And the fear-ful break-era roar; 

■P- 



z&" 



r~ r 



-3Hf 



M— ^-H B— 

i 1 — hv 



Efe 



— BE 



— tjr-3 5~ H*= 



:p: 



D.C. Chart and com-pass come from Thee, je - sus, Sav-iour, pi - lot me. 
D.C. Wondrous Sov'reign of the sea, Je - sus, Sav-iour, pi - lot me. 
D.C.May I hear Thee say to me, "Fear not, I will pi -lot thee." 



=t 



£ 



=t 



*: 



s 



:&==&=&: 



-j- 



[TP^^ 



E fc — =*- 



i 



Unknown waves be -fore me roll, Hid -ingrock9 and treach'rous shoal! 

Boist'rouswaves o -bey Thy will, WhenThousayst to them"Be stilll" 

'Twixt me and the peace-ful rest, Then while lean-ing ©a Thy breast, 

, gl - — If — rfr If If If 



V 



-19 m- 



&=*=? 



iLJ= 






g=z:^:|:i=:gz=0rz:p=: ^ 



No. 82. 

Charles H. Huff 



Look Away To Christ 






Byron Faust 



y 

1. When the way is 

2. When the road is 

3. When your heart is 






-if- 



dark and you can -not 

rough and the mountains 

sad and the way seems 



§fc# 



SS 




~A A A A A . 

b s b P P P 



1 1 B 1 1 — J— J — « — *l- H : — 



see, c And clouds of sin are hang-ing heav-y o'er jour 

steep, And you are wear -y of the load you hare to 

long With ma - ny tri - als on the way to make you 

_ JXJu^ 



w 



i2=ntz:it=is: 



4d 



i i i 

i j 4 "v n 



-A A A * — |— **— * * m : — • * — ±- 

:£=t=l=^p=t=t=:f:=E:=£=&=t: 

S p p P p^b p p p ^r-p 



yrP — H —=— ^- ' ZZfg Zfz *^ — II 



^ 



==tt 



way to 



iii: 



soul; Look a 

bear; Look a - way to 

blue; Look a - way to 






-3—3: 




Christ, He will 

Cnrist, He your 

Christ, He will 

" 1 a— a— a— a — a — • 

fflf 



— l-i — I a *— -*-- 1 1 1 Jt — f- 



set you free, And ev -'ry cloudthat hangs a - bove yoa 

soul will keep, And lift your load and ev- 'ry sor-row 

make you strong For He has promised in His word to 

& & h h k h r ; ,. 




^=P-=P=EB== 



:p=P 



p3E 



-♦- 

then will roll. 
He will share. 
See you thru. 



J. Chorus. , 



^T¥- 



=td: 



S=fc 



Look a -way to Christ, and be- 

Look a-way to Christ, 

P 



gjteiizz E_« g,===:zizr^=[ ^=z=zzg== rfaz^=^-^p=^=:ip=: 



Copjrrigiit, IB4C.br J»mes D. Vanchan. Maslc Publisher, in "Honored Guest.' 



1 — 5 — u 



Look Away TO Christ 






=*=£ 



* 



£* 



$=& 



lieveHis word, And 



His word, He is the on - ly One on whom you 



. A * *--* A A * *— I — *-=•—* A » .-— jg- 






arq. 



:3: 



-•-^ 



^-i=J:gi=ta: 



--o- 



eande - pend; 

-±-r 



pzp=rzhzl: 



^*- -♦--♦- 

Let Him hare His way, Let Him have His way, for He 

—A 



:g -|_ 



"p~p 



: ^- 



-A — A 



C i> p 






is yoar Lord, And He will lead yon on to vict-'ry in the end. 

ft h 



is yonr Lord, for 

America , 



b £ 



No. 83. 



Samuel Francis Smith 



*fa=n==± 



4zi=snz 



3=± 



: j=f-gz: fe=g 



£3 



=t 



Henry Carey 

-1 1 1- 



-*- -*- 



HHS 






1. My country 'tis of thee, Sweet land of lib-er-ty, Of thee I sing; Land where my 

2. My native country thee, Land of the no-blefree,ThynameI love; I love thy 

3. Let mu-sicswellthebreeze,Andringfrom all the trees, Sweet free-dom's song; Let mortal 

4. OurFa-ther's God! to thee, Author of lib-er-ty, ToTheewe sing;Longmayour 




V i 

fa-thersdied,Landof the Pilgrim's pride, From ev-'ry mountain side Let freedom ring, 
rocks and rills , Thy woods and tem-pled hills , My heart with rap-ture thriils Like that a - bove. 
tongues awake, Let all that breathe partake,Let rocks their si-lence break, The sound prolong. 
land be bright With freedom's ho -lylight,Protect us by Thy might, Great God, our King. 

— jj j -tz ± -g- A 



-• i -«- -#- -#- -•- -*- -**■•*- ■#■ -•- 



". — * — * — *- 



■r-tri- 



gif 



is 



No. 84. 

J. B. H, 



Let Him Come In 



Jesse B. Harden 






r 



* 



m 



U P U i 

1. There is some One at your deor,let Him come m, He has 

2. "lis the Sav-iour at your door, 

3. Don't you hear His roice to - day, 



^Plfr-^H* *— "I* * A- -A hfc 1 1 1 



b ? 5 



oh, let Him come in, Hasten, 
Do not 

4- — ♦ ~ — _? 3 — « — i \— 



v=$ 



\ 






:=t 



p 5 B p 



r 



PEJS3 



=5, 

He will re- 



U P b P 

fcnockedso oft be-fore,letHimcome in; 

He may knock no more, Let Him have 

turn jonr Lord a -way, oh, let Him come in; If you will 



-A. -A 



£_-fc 



— f— p— -F— *— *— P-r— 



-r> J> i J jf i 



a 






B 



move your load of sin, give you new hope and peace with-in, Help you a 
His own way with you, striving each day His will^to do, And He will 
on - ly o-pen wide, He willcome in and there a - bide, And you will 

.A. .A. -A- -A. .A. -A 



-\~. — o — r 1 e- • — 

-u, & — -|4 1 1 1 1 & \k A 

:§z=5=E5--Pz=fci3faz=g==i==g— g— 



/a . \' \ J LA, - A IA ^ ..|A, A 

Chorus. 



wm. 



$=3==— 



i 



§==*=fc| 



=t 



:*=fa 



^ 



5==fr 



crown of life to win, let Him come in. 
see you safe-ly thru, 
then be sat - is - fied, 



t 'f HEf 



Let Him come 



oh, let Him come in. 



EfcrP — * — * — * — * — l* — I 1 P^- 1 - F^- 



Jus 



&=*= 



in, Oh, let Him come in, Let Him come 

LetHimcomein, Oh, let Himcomein, 

'.A. -A. A -A- -A. .A- 

_ # » # . 1 1 1 1 1 1 

irs-trt; — >* — ' h ' « ss (-= 1 » » ♦ i 1 1 1 — ■* 



Copyright. 1945, by James D. Vaag-baD. Muoic Fabllaber, id "Uonorod Gatit.' 



Let Him Come In 



P-h-P- 



fctc 



-■ M ■ 



3&=4 



m^EgE*E*^E£EiE£\^= 



p f b b ^ ' T 

in and cleanse your soul from ev-'ry sin, Let Him come 

oh, let Him come in; 



j ^-f I i= 



fraJf P — A A — -* A & A 1* A— 



rs r\ £} b 



*=£= 



1 



?I23 



m 



b b t u 



h J J jUVl ju^i 

i — . • — a_-5_^£|.! ±2 — ^i_ .a — 1 



'-*\— s : 



1 ~ pb~b _ t?~X 

in, Oh, let Him come in, He will make 



(gteg==^ 



Let Him come in, 
— • — — 9 — 



. -* — * — * — 3 — ^- 



-I 9 — I- 



oh, let Him come in, 



v- 



3&=$=#dp= 



j. 



-£=P — £ — F 



* r p b 



t F A ; F j-iSJ- ; 






you re - joice with-in, let Him come in, oh, let Him come in. 

6 IN , 



_a. -A- -A- I 

-# 9 — *- 



r J> * ./ i? i 






No. 85. How Sweet The Name Of Jesus Sounds 



John Newton 






:£=g 



~1— 4-r 



Rev. Thomas Hastings 



=t 



3= 



=«-«- e | J-J-^ 



=t 



-I— j-j£d AH- 



1. How sweet the name of Je - sus sounds, In a be -liev-er's ear! It soothes his 

2. It makes the wounded spir- it whole, And calms the trou-bled breast; 'Tisman-na 

3. By Himmy pray'rs ac-cept-ancegain,Al-tho'with sin de - filed, Sa- tan ac- 




sorrows, heal his wounds, And drives a -way his fear, And drives a- way his fear, 
to the hun-gry soul, And to the wea-ry rest, And to thewea-ry rest, 
cus-es me in vain, And I am owned a child, And I am owned a child. 

J 4 



No. 86. 

W. B. W 



m 



£ 



ON WINGS OF LOVE. 

IS 



f> 



£dM 



W. B. WALBERT. 



=£ 



£ 



4 



BE 



g ■•' c t g 



l> PTr 



1. Some hap - py day, some morn-ing fair, . 

2. How soon 'twill be,' I can - not tell, . 

3. And when at last shall dawn that day, . 



g^ 



I 



: - f gfr 



l£ 



s 



-^ 



£ 



v- P 



fc 



it 



^rr p 



-+*« 



h 



^ 



-»-#■ 



-b b p p p 



^ "P U U U U 

When thru with earth - - r - ~- -' - ly toil and care, (with toil and care;) 

But this I know, that all is well, (yes, all is well;) 

If I am faith ------ ful all the way, (yes, all the way;) 



£ 



i 



•£ 



e=r 



-(* — IV- 



£JF f £ 






!&& 



:£S= 



i=F 



^= b^)~g 



tr-tr 



i 



i 



^ 



±& 



^=^^ 



Is 



-©c 



¥ 



1 



rrr 



My soul shall mount on wings of love, , 

I am con • tent let come what may, . 

I'll join the mil lions gone be • fore, . 



Fft 



tfrjc 






bM 



V U 5 



-* — £■ 



^ ft 



&. 



-P- 



fe 



£ 



£ 



fc=^ 



=P : 



*=4>— U 



lr 



V 



-*-* 



f rtn tn p 



I 



i ■ — " U ~V~ 

To re-gions bright in heav'n a • bove, (m heav'n a - bove.) 

• ■ ■ sus all the way, (yes, all the way.) 
■ • - iour ev - er-more, (for ■ ev • er-more.) 



To f ol - low Je 
And praise the Sav 



*■ 



Mm 



t-i- rr^-l -^}- 



1 



5 



=u— y— e 



f 



'Chorus. 



S=tajt 



fe^ 



-»-# 



1 



^T^ 



tT5t5 



Oh, hap • py day! sweet hap • py dayl 

Oh, hap-py dayl sweet hap • py day! 




COPYRIGHT, 1935. W. B. WALBERT, OWNER. 



ON WINGS OF LOVE. Concluded. 



, J> J> J> £ 



-& 



£ 



7=^==W 



■+-*- 



T+ 



P 






P t 5 

hen cares sha 



v^T 



1T 

When cares snail all have passed a - way; 

When cares shall all have passed a • way; 



S£± 



£ 



:=f 



'p 1*' 



^ — p M— V 



-s- 



V- 



v- 



T^p 



I 



^ 



M=J 



b t> 



i 



1 



a _ a l „- 



*" 



F 



^ G T 



r 15 ^^ 



My soul shall live 



in mansions bright, 
My soul shall live in mansions bright, 



f- gg- ft 



S 



feta g 



r> p 



i 



-& 



* 



i 



3CjE 



T 



~* : T 

where comes no night 



In that sweet home 



In that sweet home 



D L> P 

where comes no night. 



£1 



;g b E fe c =|= j_4_U_ 



I 



No. 87. 



^E 



MORNING PRAISE. 



i 



£#e 



s 



Ffff 



f=* 



1. A ■ wake my soul! and with the sun Thy dai • ly stage of du - ty run; 

2. Thanks be to Thee, who safe has kept, And hast refresh 'd me while I slept; 

3. Di • re'ct, con-trol, sug-gest this day, All I de-sign, or do, or say; 



m 



p p p 

J A AJ 



t 



p h h 



s^ 



-U-4>-4>- 



^ 



1 



K J) h fa 



J P p J 



i 



I 



f 



^ 



f ! . v U 

Shake off dull sloth, and joy - ful rise To pay thymorn-ing sac-ri- 

Oh, grant that when from death I wake, I may of end-less life par- 

That all mypow'swith all their might, In thy sole glo - ry may u- 



fice. 
take, 
nite. 



te 



£ 



2— £ 



i 



?x 



5 



^— ^— £ 



5= 



=5= 



No. 88. Heaven's A Wonderful Place 

M. W. E, Marion W. Easterling 



pa— U&-9 — 5 — -— -♦ — « — 5 — ♦ — #—-4 — ■ 1 — m — -I — M — * — ' 

ef . r w * -■- - 9 - 



1. There is a Cit-y grand somewhere on a distant strand, Hap-pi - ness 

2. Where the still wat-ers flow, the f air - est of flowers grow, Youthful and 

3. Out on the hills of home 'neath hea? - en's bright star-ry dome, Mil -lions of 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

— . -f_:tr_-t- t~_*_ ~t— « — k — « — k— rs — k — s — « — *— Bk — 
v -■- 

there a-waits each trusting soul;Nev-er a care is known there we shall live 
hap - py, none shall e'er grow old;When the redeemed march in, pa - rad- ing will 
saints ar-raved in spotless white; Praise the dear Lord and King, while gold - en harps 

-A- 

.-£"__• — k — « — k — 
Chorus. 










^^Lit-iE-i: 



P=t 







=t 



fc 



"^Et^S^z^ 



=F 



fe^fel 



on and on, While the e- ter - nal hap-py a - ges roll, 
then be-gin,On the bright shining streets of pur-est gold. 
sweetlyring,Won-der-ful place of peace and pure de-light. 



Heaven's a 



m — k — s — r* — P— fik— nP — --- — * — Eh — ^— P*— r«l— id — «tf— r 1 



fcfc 



' at 



BSese 



M=^ 



-=r— g- 



F-ft— &-&=£ 



-P=P=f 



P P 



Ff 



-A— 

V 



* «. 3. — 5 ^ 1 £ii_ 



T p 5 ^ p 

Wonderful, place,'Tis filled with God's love and grace,Bright angels on 
Wonderful, glad place, Boundless love and grace, 

-A- -A- -A- 

m — 9 — K — h- m ^_«_t_t_-t: 



k "P- 



?^u-si — 1 ft — h— s r- 


>* 




F^=2=^= : ? : 


-=1 — s 


•j 


' J 1 -p- p P 

ev - 'ry hand, a 
Ev- 'ry hand, 


—it- 


P 
■ bi - lant 


— . — • — rr • — 

r -»^= 

cho - rus grand, 
cho-rus grand, 

-A- -A- -A- 

r t- f t" 
Z* A A 'A 


A A — 

5 t> p 

The beau-ti - 


ful 




— ^— 




E t= P t3 


I »\ 






Copyright, 1946, by Junes D. V»nsrhan. MqbIc Publisher. In "Honored GcoBt. 



Heaven's A Wonderful Place 



fe=^=i=^=J=i- 



-P 



*=m 



p 



pr «n J gzgztE 






fcfefe 



1 P P 

songs of Zi-on sweet - ly ring; What a glad time 'twill besoms 

songs of Zi - on sweetly ring; Happy time' twill be, 

— * -•— -I*- -t- 



_?=2=P — _p F p± — f- h -t-f 






t== 



-r^-p- 






*=£ 



^v^te^ 



SaPf- 



$ i> i> v y [> 



i J p g b u ' 

morning for you and me, We'll gath-er a - ronnd the throne,with loved ones who've 
there for you and me, 'Round the throne, 




long since gon«,For-ev-er to be with Christ onr Lord, and _ Lord, and King. 
long since gone, Ba with Christ our King. 

-A- -A- -A- C\ -A- A M 



t 



:-. 






— *-*-T— -fe^Z^Z^j 



r « g— g — ^— zzz±zx 



t= 



No. 89. 

FAWCETT. 



Blest Be The Tie That Binds 

Hans Georg Nageli. 




■kA ■* 



1. Blest be 

2. Be - fore 

3. We share 

4. When we 



the tie that binds Our hearts 

our Fa - ther's throne We pour 

our mu - tual woes, Our mu 
a - sun - der part, It gives 



in 

our 
tual 
us 



-TN 



r^ 



&=fc 



Chris - tian love; 

ar - dentpray's; 
bur - dens bear; 

in - ward pain; 



m 



£z= 



BE 



^ 



r 



-I L. 



fc 



fe^=* 



=*= c ? 



The fel - 
Our fears, 
And oft - 
But we 



low-ship 
our hopes, 
en for 
shall still 



Ffc 



¥ 



of kin - dred minds 

our aims are one, 

each oth - er flows 

be joined in heart, 

TV- -m- j> 

=g- f^ = t=F^ 



Is 

Our 
The 
And 



r 



fc^^i 



like 
com 
sym ■ 
hope 

rv 



to that a-bove. 

forts and our cares. 

■ pa-thiz - ingtear. 

to meet a-gain. 



-+—K- 



_<2_ 



-7T 



No. 90. 

Mrs. D. E. McG. 



Keep Shining on Me 



Mrs. D. E. McGuire 



i — z 4 _ *i — >s «. — ♦— * — ,♦ — • — • ♦ a- t 



■ L nl-rr 



p I b p p 



1. The Light of tbe world is shining on me,. 

2. This wonderful Light is flooding my way,. J 

3. Oh, wonderful Light keepshining on me, 

. «_«_«__« N J /* * • fc _ 



4 



-±zM: 



----3: 



:P=^=b=P=t=- 



£=£ 







fetoE 



mm 



d2^; 



s 



Since Je-sus has saved and made me so free, and mademe so free; 

And turning my night to beau-ti-fulday, to beau-ti - ful day; 

Till I shall get home withJe-susto be, with Je -sus to be; 



;^EEE=EpEp 



9-H-0 — - — •—- H — #—5- -©- 

— u— a — ^s— ■ -= — * — ♦ — ♦ — ♦ ♦ ♦- 



=3=H=P 



^ft 



■^irmr^ 



No longer my heart is lone-ly and sad, 

"fis guiding my steps wherev-er I go, 

And When I am there with those that I love, 



nrp-r* 



\ 



~gd? •* _ EE=fafc=P=E 



—=±b= 



>=t=£ 



fcfc 



1 !i 5 P P P 



£= 
-*-i- 



h--g— g — F— b- 



1 






ii 



tf P P » k P J p y g p p 

Salvation has made me hap-py and glad, so hap- py and glad. 

And fill-ingmy soul with heav-en- ly glow, with heaY-ea - ly glow. 

Keep shining on me for-ev-er, a- bove,for-ev-er a-bove. 



idtigg 



fe 



*=*Ft 



HE 



Chorus 



-j — u— u— u ■ r. *— I — 0- #— •- - 
t-_p_p= p - tr-^ rr g-p 



£ 



1 



p-E-*!— § ffc -g— 3-8—3—3 — »— — F g A sH 



&"ft 



Oh, wonderful Light keep shin-ing on me, 
Oh wonderful Light keep shin-iBg on me, 

-*- ■*; -*- -Ah I ' 

i _ .*i a i T ~~ 

:fcfcS=EEEE 



tnrtr* 



^ 



A-q— S- 



zEzihzzF— gzz»— ta=3 



Oopyrigrht. 1946. by Jnmea D. Vmnrhnn. Mnaic Pnblisher. in "Honored Gueat." 



p=H : 



Keep Shining on Me 



2=5 



fit^z^-M 



tx ^(3 udp. - t w 

Till heaven with all its glo-ry I see; 

Till heaven with all 






p p p 



E* 



its glo -ry I see; 



UfclL— p— |= 







1 X 



safe) in heaven a-bove,(inheav-en a-bove,) 



_ * — ^ — A p ^ 4 J — A — H_L ^ _ _ A _U 



H 



Keepshining on me(Keepshin-ing on me) Thy won-der-fnl love. (Thy won-der-M love.) 



@S33E 



. *_«_#_$« 



S 



r=l— f 



-K=5- 



*=r= 



ULJUJJL JL 



— P r ^~^~P=^-i 



p pp" 



No. 91. 

Charlotte Elliott. 



Just As I Am 



Wm. b. Bradbury. 



te 



f^-fy 



feq= 






g| 



S 



■ a a- 



:pc 



1. Just 

2. Just 

3. Just 

4. Just 

5. Just 



as 

3.3 

as 

as 
as 



= 



am! 
am! 
am! 
am! 
am! 

-&- 



with-out one plea, But that Thy blood was shed for me, 
and wait - ing not, To rid my soul of one dark blot, 
tho' toss'd a-bout, Withmany a conflict many a doubt, 
poor wretched blind, Sight, rich -es, heal-ing of the mind, 
Thou wilt receive, Wilt welcome, pardon, cleanse, relieve; 



f^=- 



■R- 



±M 



f- r <?. 



ir^H 



a k- 



~^& 






m 



a 



** 



-«i — 



And that ThouMdd'st me come to Thee, Lamb of God! 
To Thee whoseblood can cleanse eachspot, Lamb of God! 
With f ear3 with-in and foes with-out, Lamb of God! 
Yea, all I need in Thee to find, Lamb of God! 
Be - cause Thy prom-ise I be-lieve, Lamb of God! 



I come! I cornel 
I come! I come! 
I come! I come! 
I come! I come! 
I come! I come! 



-A 



.<2_ 



:tr_ 



rl 



<si. r/^r; 



t^jL 



3 



H 



m 



No. 92. 

A. C. 





A. Curtis 
-*. — ■ # - -9- ■ ■ -^ ;J; j. ^. # . 



1. I'm a trav-'lin'thru this 

2. I'm a pil-grimroam • in' 

3. I must trav- el on till 



un-friend-ly world, 
thru-out this life, 
my task is done, 



fc^F* — ■*' — ' 



5H=B 






k — Fl A A 



r^r 



I'm a trav-'lin', 
I'm a roam- in', 
I'm a trav-'lin', 

-b—b- rt-jg L- 

—A A — Mi £s — 



i -•- -•- " 

let love's ban-ner be un- furled, 

-ingwea - ry of sin and strife, 

the fight till the vie -t'rv's won, 



j W— F| g — J ^— F^ ; 

Just a trav-'lin';Lordon me 

Just a roam -in'; And I'm grow 

Just a trav-'lin'; I mustfight 




As I trav -el to 
But I soon will leave 
Bless- ed Je -sus, lead 



my home. Lord, I'm trav-'lin', 

it all. 

me on. Lord, I'm trav-'lin' 

_A. .A- A- 



just a 



-I" P p' L g 

J -1 1 ,_ ri 1 1 




trav - 'lin', 

just a trav-'lin', 




Thru this world I sad - ly roam, I'm a 

— P — rJ ,♦ A 



-P — ► — P r P p k j-A ,♦ *- 

— k k— fc ~ £1 — r k fc k Ik — 1- | 1 h- 



r- — p — p t r — r— r 

1 — h— ft— H 1 — b— -ft-s 

£— tr^tdJ— F 



=t 



, A 



pil - grim, and I'm wea - ry, 

I'm a pil -grim, wea - ry pil-grim, 



I want my Je - sus to 

Je - sus 




Copyright. 1945 by Jamos D. Vaagh 



in " Honored Guest, 



I'm A Trav'lin' 

- — 1 1— I— ^-J-fifiiH^Hk P h P-|— feg— 

trv r p w Tv ; ^ ~ r I P P p * f P J 



FT 

car-ry me home; 
soon to take 
■ £ •- 



me home; 
-P- -•- 



I am oh, so lone 

as I trav-el I am oh, 

.A- -A. 

-#- -# -•- -F -I 1— -F- 



^: 



-0 g ^ r!*z:5: 



EEB^ 



•j r tsr - -*- -•- p i p i 



- ly, 

so lone-ly, 

— k_>_k — 

"I p u 

:Us: 



P P 

Life looks brighter on yon-der side, Soon I'm cross 

I'll 



ing 

be cross -ing 



— -i * — F* — a a ^ F- 

-1 h FVS r -l 1— &- 



-P- 




No. 93. 

Mrs. Margaret M. Kay 



Asleep in Jesus 



W. B. Bradbury 



tet=a=$==p=£mc=£==fr 



ft h h 



iii 



- — 1<^4 1 1 1 & * 1 *— 



'-ArA 5 



^~ 



*=3=* 



1. A-sleep in 

2. A-sleep in 

3. A-sleep in 

4. A-sleep in 



Je -sus! bless -ed sleep, From which none ev - er wake to weep! 
Je-sus! howsweet,To be for such a slum-ber meet! 
Je-sus! peaceful rest, Whose wak- ing is su-preme-ly blest! 
Je-sus! for me May such a bliss- ful ref-uge be! 






*=t 



P— "£— g — ?— 

U U P (z — 



=t2=t2=:t|zz 



*= 



*=± 



fe£ 



— r P — P — P — P- 



r— d 






Ft=P=^=p:H: 



i 



fcfc 



nr 



B 



*=t 



I 



=t 



* 



A calm and un - dis-turbed re-pose,Un-brok-en by the last of foes. 
With ho- ly con - fi - dence to sing That death has lost its venomed sting. 
No fear, no woe, shall dim that bourThat man - i -fests the Saviour's pow'r. 
Se - cure-ly shall my ash • es lie,Wait-ing the summons from on high. 



SE 



pFF 



J 
-f — g-Fg— 5 



p— p— p rb i — s — r~ n=; 



k =— r fci— k P k— rS F P P 



E=S=z?=:EEB 



No. 94 



W. B. Walbert 




$==£ 



I Want My Life to Tell 

J, > Js— b- 



Harvey A. Lewis 






*=*: 



±Di 



1 X 

I want to 



$=H: 



- P * 



P P P P P J £ P P J 

1. I want to live .... for Christ each day (for Christ each day), 

2. I want to help .... some struggling soul (some struggling soul), 

3. I want, some day, .... thru sav - ing grace (thru sav - ing grace), 

P h b h h 



£ 



£=£ 



m 



zfcfc 



^ — ^ 



fL 



■p~P~P~P~ 



=B=£ 



=fc 



i 



-4 



±>- 



=3£ 



•Ph 



While trav-'ling down . . 
To find the bless 
To see my Sav 



m 



± 



j ^ p p n p p p 

. life's rug-ged way (life's rug- ged way); 
ed heav'n-ly goal (the heav'n-Iy goal); 
■ iour, face to face (yes, face to face), 
b 



£— £ 



-x 



-=l £- 



^ _L)_j^^=g 



■P— P" 



P— P" 



£=£: 



-15 b- 



*H*" 



3EZ3E 



p pT 



i * 'p p 

I want the world . 

I want my life . 

And praise Him for . 



i> p 



l s 



§£ 



£ 



to see in me (to see in me), 
for Him to tell (for Him to tell) 
His won-drous love (His won-drous love), 

. - - P h b b £ 



m 



± 



$=£ 



* — A — tt * n - 



1? 



tt 



it 



US 



-fc 



±>: 



45=* 



-3 — s- 



:s£ 



The bless - ed Christ . . . . of Cal - va - ry (of Cal - 

And know each day that all is well (that all 

In that sweet home . ... in heav'n a-bove (in heav'n 



gzfc 



-=1 — £- 



I I m 



■=— » » m m • 9 



I 



va - ry). 
is well), 
a-bove). 



m 



--^ 



Chorus 



-3 35- 



i — « — * — » — v 1— 



X\ ^ H 



3=3=3 



f 



£=£: 



V—b- 



Z P P F * 
I want to live .... . for Him 

I want to live for Him each day (for Him 

t 1 1 I J? ' . ji_J)J! 



each day, 
each day), 



-=1— «- 



?d2: 



£ p b*-Cg^ 



= P=P=P : 



Copyright. 1945. by James D. Vaughan Music Publiihor, in Honored Quest.' 



I 



I Want My Life to Tell 

h b b d r - ^ v 



^ 



And walk the bright 



P p V P p 

And walk the bright and shin-ing way; 



i=5: 



l> f> h l> 

k! a 1 a! aL 



and shin-ing way, the shin-ing way; 



3=S 



D [) g-^ p 



I 



£=£ 



-h — hr 



^=^=^ 



=^ 



I want the world 
IN h f\ t\ 

Ml J ^j Mi'' 



I want the world to see in me, to see in me 



to see in me, 



Air 



jLh 



■7 



1 



P P 



rT^ 



iv 



-fV 



-rHr 



^5=3(: 



P Z 



1 



~^ Tp f f P ' J P 

The bless -ed Christ of Cal - va - ry. . . 

The bless- ed Christ of Cal - va - ry, of Cal - va - ry. 



t> 3 g 



5= 



=0 — ^— P — F 



No. 95 

E. A. H. 



Enough for Me 






Rev. E. A. Hoffman 

n 1 h 



tc 



1 



-s£i «- 



9 »~i 9 9 9 9Z~Z^ * 

1. love sur-pass - ing knowl-edge! grace, 

2. won -der- ful sal - va - tion! From sin 

3. blood of Christ, so pre - cious, Poured out 
g ft » • ♦ ♦ ftr "o * i ^H 



g^: 



£E 



uic 



so full and freel 
He makes me free! 
on Cal - va - ry! 

-»- f '- -P- rl^« 



4- 



i 



L_ LiL . : 



-p- 



CHO.-^nd #ia£'s e-nough for me, . 
I b_J ! , 



i 



that's e - nough for me; 

D. C. for Chorus 



I know that Je - sus saves me, 
I feel the sweet as - sur - ance, 
I feel its cleans - ing pow - er, 



And that's 
And that's 
And that's 



~* 9 *~ "-&— 

e- nough for me. 
e-nough for me. 
e-nough for me. 



m 



r- 1 



1**- 



/ know that Je - sus saves me, And that's e - nough for me. 



No. 96 Each Day Brings Me Nearer Home 



w. c. c. 



Dedicated to Mrs. Johnnie Waddle, Tishomingo, Miss. 

Walter C. Carter 



Ak iP- 


-f> #- 


=4^= 




— N . -B 


F=i 


- ±: 


-I 


§?i:|_S_ 

1. Thru 

2. As 

3. This 


J ■ 1 o> 

all the years, 

I look back. 

lov - ing one.. 




s r » ^ 


— e- 

vears.. 


— ^ 


-1 








N* 


-*- 
1- 

!=SZZtK 


-A- 
A 


-A- -A- -A- 

•f= 1= r— E- 

-JA i =j si -1 Is— 


-A- -A- -A- 

-f — p — U— 


-1 


l^-p-4^ 1 - 




±$r. 


P 


■P— P 


: P 


-p— ^=p= 


-1 



H> h v 



£=fc 



;-r 



s=i 



^£ 



So much of grief, it makes me 

My eyes are dimmed with bit - ter 

Is liv - ing now, with all the 



zLg — 9 — , — » — » 



r r r 



sad (it makes me sad); 
tears (withbit-ter tears); 
free (with all the free); 

.. • t ? p" : 

—far !s F h 1 



frfr- 



-=]—*- 



:p=tt 



trlnrlr- u~ P^ 



H2 = ±: 



^ 



» 



f^=i 



=5==^ 



i 



=p= 



But bless - ed tho't, 
To think of boys. 
All healed a - new, . 

-A- 



that makes me smile, 
for whom we yearn, 
with an - gels there, . 




M 



I 



'Twill all be o'er some aft - er 'while (some aft - er 'while). 

There's one I miss who'll ne'er re - turn (who'll ne'er re - turn). 

- - - ly Cit - y fair (the Cit - y fair). 

■A- -A- -A- -A- D f) h Ol D f) 

!fc-_-£_:fc_-^ -r j— r 4 4 ± ga *_ 

-U, U, p. * ■ 1 : 



With - in the Ho - 



: ^- p- p-P =P=^= E =pp 



1 



^£ 



V 



Chorus 



£=£=&=$: 



J 



fij 1 g 



i 



-=i — *- 



D P i> U - 



* 



As each day brings the set - ting sun, 

As each day brings the set -ting sun, 

J) j)i j 
1 X -) g g g g »i g 



£± 



g^ 



4^ 



^P=P=£: 



-» — 
"p- 

Copyright, 19io, by Jarac8 D. V»ughan, Music Publisher, in ' Honored Quest.' 



, J? i D b 
s — — * I 



Eacr^UayBnngsMeNearerHome 



££=& —£ —£ 



m 



^>—^ — g: 



-3-n 



-q— •- 



I'm near - er to the crown I've won; 

I'm near - er to the crown I've won, .... 



*1 -■- -■- -H- -■- *1 



J? J 5 



P I) 



*] JL JL. _ JB. 



$=&=£ 



±z=t2=p: 



S=fc 



1 



^r 






-=i — *■ 



b b h r> 



=£==J 



V 



~-9- 



^ 



-=1 — *- 



-H^—J 



•■■■....■■■ u-m > 

I'll then for - get the bit - ter tears, , 



t)- L r 



m 



I'll then for- get 



the bit - ter tears, 

-A- -A- -A- 



£=£ 



-=1 «" 



=5=^=^= 



± 



- P—P— P - 




£: 



: 9 : 



i^=^ 



-d: 



_k ii_ 



And be at 



V p 'p b p *p— fr 

rest thru end - less years 

And be at rest thru end -less years (thru end-less years). 



m 



-A- -A- -A- -A- 

j g- - j r -p - j E 



* 



b b b t b" b 



:p=P — g— P: 



& 



-=1 — *- 



:P=^ 



No. 97 My Faith Looks Up to Thee 



Ray Palmer 



Lowell Mason 




& 






1. My faith looks up to Theejhou Iiamb of Cal-va - ry, Saviour Di-vine; Now hear me 

2. May Thy rich grace impart Strength to my fainting heart, My zeal in-spire; As Thou hast 

3. While life's dark maze I tread And griefs around me spread, Be Thou my Guide; Bid darkness 



zfrizfciEt fcZZKI ifczx 



2 1±2. 



M£ 



-P— P- 



_\5) — e — 5_ l|p-i_|». 



p-^-p— g i r 7 •> b 



is: 



t= 



, r* f t=- 



t=£=!=d 






^=3 

3=2 



3±* 



Ha 1 1— ', — *— 



=i=t 



fe: 



A— "-A-T-A- 



Uli 



I 

while I pray, Take all my sins a-way, let me from this day Be whol-ly Thinel 
died for me, may my love to Thee, Pnre,warm and changeless be A liv - ing fire, 
turn to-day, Wipe sorrow's tears a-way, Nor let me ev - er stray From Thee a-side. 

1- rf ,-r *-* -4=4=4=-, -p- # _^ -|r r t 



-I — P-I — E[= 



==£== 



in 6. ys 

Fay Wallington 



I'm I raveling Along 



Minzo C. Jones 



p. , 






L 






ft 


f- 7s 






(/. f A 






fc 


n 


P P 




P P 






/kkt r\ 


5 B 


R 


_n 






■j 




~~R 


K> p 


(®-*-4: P • 


5_i£r 


— *— 


■^ 


1 


-fla — 1 


1— 


1 1- 


— *i ' Hm 


- «' 


?f ^ A — a— #"— 

•J -,1- 7i «- 

1. I'm trav - el - 
2. 'Tis won-der- 
3. I know that 


— *— 

ful 
He 

# 


— « — 

a - 

to 
will 

hi 


long 
save 
lead 


— y — -*— 

with my 
Him walk 
me on 

n ft 


— Ar— 

Ee- 
be - 
and 


— a *— 

deem - er 
side me 
up - ward 


-i?J-fl$ — v — ' 

o - ver life's 
thru the dark 
till I am 

* k • 


z^_i, 4, * — z a* 






-ft 


JWi. f 


— hr — 


» » 








a 
u 


~ft~ 


-H— 


tr> — 1* 


—A— 


*■ A 


ft n 


1* 


^ 17 ^4- P p p 


V 


V- 


-P- 


— P— p- 


P 


-P P- 


V-J$ 


P 




rough and 
val - 
safe with 



rug 
here 
Him 



be 
at 



way. 
■ low, 
home, 



So 

And 

And 



mrr—r- 



hap - pi - ly we walk a - long to- 
know that if I trust Him, He will 
join the ho - ly saints and an - gels 

*— h* ^— W— rs *=£— = kr- 



b£* 



^=b=^=^: 



*=E 



:p=P=P: 



P P 



£=*=£ 



331 



side (yes, 

love (His 

throne (a - 



geth - er, side 
keep me by 
sing - ing round 



by 

His 

the 



zSEp: 



*=fe 



S 



P P 5 p p 

side by side); I'm head-ed 

match-less love); It 

round the throne); Oh, 



gives me 
what a 



A.* 



for 
new 
glad 

n 



-t > V P 



Hi— h 3 d d h * *- 



P P- 



s 



fc^r 



zB —ft-fc-fr zzS 



^=#^ 



home where the saints are sing - ing, in a 
hope of a bet - ter coun- try, where I 
time we will have to - geth - er, nev - er 

« m — e * » i , m k 



-■- -■- -■- -p-a- Al- 
bright land of per -feet day, 
shall some day with Him go 
a - gain from Him to roam, 



-r- — am 

1s— V 



m 



felt 



p 



:t 



:t 



i2z£ — y— pz ^) j) p— p g g p 



m=f 



&s 



&=£=$: 



-fc 



Fine 



IiSI 



i=*C& 



PI 



fc 



4=ffc 



$=^ 



u 



-AJ Li) a:. 



5«t 



* 



P P P P p 

With all my hap-py loved ones there for-ev - er to a- bide (yes, to a -bide). 
And live with-in a man-sipn He prepares in heav'n a-bove (in heav'n a-bove). 
With hal-le - lu-jahs ring-ing, we will crown Him Lord and King (our Lord and King). 

U m > b h • m b \) I> b b 



^^ 



£ 



^P= 



"P- 
D.S.--4nd / sAaW soon be in that land to live with Him for aye (to live for aye). 

Copyright, 1915, by James D. Vaughan, Music Publisher, in "Honored Quest." 



Chorus 



i in i lavemig i-viuiig 



fr-rr-fr 



P 



:^ 



±=tp=i25 



£fc 



SE 



I'm trav-el-ing a-Iong with Him on the bright and shin- ing way, 

the shin-ing way, 



:3=£=Ct 



: ^- 



fcbz: 



P^H=F 



rtr 



-♦ — b*-R 



"p— tr 



:fc=&r=t?=& 



§ 



P F "0 P " ■ ■ " ' F b """ D " " I " "P 

Where used to be the shadows dim, He has turned to brightest day; 

to brightest day; 

jl q£ 3*: jl 



gE5 



±2: 



^ £- 



¥= 



££££= 



:fc=^=N 



^^^^^^=^^=^=-H^^^=^=£ 



p — p — p - 

D.8. 



1 



yj-t 






g 



* 



"P- 



[7 1 S^ P 1— P 5j— p 1 K 

No long-er I go the downward Toad, I'm headed for heaven's blest a - bode, 
Go the road, heav'n's a - bode. 



m 



-t — t 



4=- 



ii 



ffi 



jt 



-^— ^— 3— «- 



:p: 



It 



No. 99 

E. W. Blandly 



Where He Leads Me 



C. S. Norris 



$=fc=£F35 



34 



5? 






4 rr-aP+l-f^ i— al4 -| 



1. I can hear my Sav-iour call - ing, 

2. I'll go with Him thru the gar-den, 

3. He will give me grace and glo -ry, 



"p * 

I can hear my Sav - iour call-ing, 
I'll go with Him thru the gar-den, 
He will give me grace and glo - ry, 



Ft p~ i — p- 1 ' 3 



-4: — Ifc-^ — K — j* - ^ ! 4 *~ — ^ 



?^— g= j£ 



£ 



1 P— ^ 

CHO.-PF/iere i?e /eacte #e / will fol-low, Where He leads He 



* 




* 



/ m?j7/ fol-low, 
D. O. for Chorus 



g53l 



$=&: 



A 



3 



ft 



i-^^i-i^i: 



P P 

I can hear my Sav-iour call-ing, Take thy cross and fol-low, fol - low me. 

I'll go with Him thru the gar-den, I'll go with Him, with Him all the way. 

He will give me grace and glo-ry, And go with me, with me all the way. 



t±=fc 



— I 1 I T r 1 ? — r i C> . n 

£=3t— la-s— k= k • 1»* D~=F=H 

« 1- Li hA Li La, 1 1 ■■ ■-' ■-■ 



&9=$=$~- 



-^r-P 



Where He leads me I 



V I p p P tr 

wnV/ /o/ - low, I'll go with Him, with Him all the way. 



V-V 



JAU. 1UU 

Adger M. Pace 



Jesus Is coming Again 



Mrs. Mabel Gibbons 






2 



*=*=& 



:2=tzjz 



S^ 



j5 — i 



p 

1. Je - bus is com - ing, oh, let us re - joice, Cora 

2. Glo - ry will fill us and we shall be glad, Glad 

3. Won-der - ful tho't, we shall see Him that day, See 

-A- -A-. 



■ ing in 

we are 

Him as 



WB_.KCt — p, U w 



Mfc 



'±$±1-^ 



P — P P P= I~P P P - 



i 



i=- 



:p=P=P: 



=fe-±=^: 



5=:h=±— fcza 



£M 



:z-z=znzpz^q=^:zn==m=42=zp=^==3=Lrjrzuze=ziu^4Z= 



glo - ry and love; 
cleansed from all stain; 
nev - er be - fore; 



Com -ing for all who have made Him their choice, 
Hap -py that know-ing Him, none will be sad, 
Shin -ing with splen-dor, in heav'n-ly ar - ray, 



I: 



#FP— E 



:p=t 



=-P=P= 



fdfc: 

-^ JA_ 

:P=P: 



-r r r 



-*— 



*=fciE 




^_i>- 



Chorus 



£=0: 



-A>— 



^ 



-*r 



- ing a- 



Tak - ing them with 
Je - sus is com 
We shall His beau 



Him a - bove. 

■ing a - gain. 

- ty a - dore. 

\) 



Com 



Com-ing a - gain, 




gain, 

com-ing a -gain 



is com - m§ 

com-ing to reign, 



E£ 



to reign,. . . . 

com-ing to reign, He is 



«d2z35==fc~k 

l£:2=p=p— P=p 



^=S : 



>— *■- 
P P 



5=p: 



;^g^ 







p _p 

Com - - ing 

Com-ing in pow'r, 



£=fr=±=^: 



& 



^5=t5==?5=r5= 



Bt K fc. k. 



in pow'r, to 

glo -ri- ous pow'r, 
_£_ jp. jl .p. 



this earth once a- 

back to this earth, 

-B- _ B - -g. -». 

H h- — I 

\—m ■ m m — 



JJ-Zzz * ^ =p=^=g=g: 



CopTPipht. 1M5 W J nnos P. Vau-lian Music Pnhlfahi 



Honored Guest 



J 



w 



d? h t> t> -& : 



tt 



f= 



esus Is Coming Again 



i 



fi=fc:£=£: 



tnpp - 



_B_ 



P ^ p 



fcfc: 



gain; Let us re-]oice, ev-'ry 

back once a-gain; Oh, then let us re-joice, let us re-joice, 

*■ ^ ^ ^--^ — r iU£_i£_t - - - - 



1*=?=*: 



p • p . p-p-M- Lp 



:P=p=p: 



:£=:£ 



£-5=v 



£=:£: 



A ' 



« — ^ l^i — « — « — «. — ~_ 



s 



^5=35=3?: 



D * ^ 



P 



u 



£ 



heart, ev-'ry voice, .'. Sing the re- 

ev-'ry glad heart, ev-'ry glad voice, Free-ly sing the re-frain, 



s 



=F 



:►=*=*: 



j£=i&— rn 



-P— U— P— P- 



• — * 

p=P: 



^_ 



: ^ : 



k — l -) 



P P P P 



-trtr 



^4-4)4^ 4^ 



z2^z 



-ad-s — i 



n 



1 



frain, .'• bless-ed Je - sus is com-ing a - gain 

sing the re-frain, He's com-ing a - gain. 






i 



fcp— P— p— P— *: 



*L *. JL . A . JN ^ b 

t- f -a - >- f - — — -■- 



=£=P=P= 



:P=P=p: 



PI 



No. 101 

A. M. T/OPLADY 



Rock of Ages 



Thos. Hastings 
. Fine 

&— 5: 




1. Rock of a - ges, cleft for me, Let me hide my -self in Thee; 

2. Not the la - bor of my hands Can ful - fill the law's de-mands; 

3. While I draw this fleet-ing breath, When my eyes shall close in death; 



gzHH 



B^_^. zj ^£^E bj 



:t: 



-#— 



t= 






-P— Fp— 1 



p d b - r 



:£ 



B.C. — Be of sin the dou-ble cure, Cleanse me from its guilt and pow'r. 
B.C. — All for sin could not a -tone, Thou must save and Thou a - lone. 
B.C. — Rock of a - ge9, cleft for me, Let me hide my - self in Thee. 

• D.C. 



fckrrv 



M 



3?- 



35: 



H3- 



£=& 



4- 



oc 



^ c= 9 = 



—1— H 



fv 



B 



is 



Let the »wa - ter and the blood, From Thy wound-ed side which flowed, 
Could my zeal no res - pite know, Could my tears for - ev - er flow, 
When I soar to worlds un-known, See Thee on Thy judg-ment throne, 

b- — S— Pi- b- — £ b — h I ^a- — b — FS— — b E — r— I 



r=y=g=H= u— D— g 



=p=£ 



:p=g=g: 



No. 102 

W. T. 



Going Home to Be with God 



Wesley Tucker 




$: 



=£ 



±: 



rc- 



* * IMF IT * t 

1. There's a home for me in heav-en (up in heav-en), 

2. In that home are man - y man-sions (man-y man-sions), 

3. When I'm thru with toil and trou-ble (toil and trou-ble), 



^=s: 



3t=* 



i>=4: 



j j * i k — k — fr" 



*=S 



P P P P P 



£fc 



-h — r>i 



S^ 



*"* 



* 



i rr 



* ' P P P . w ' ' P P P v 

When on earth I've ceased to plod (I've ceased to plod); 

Built of jew - - els high and broad ( so high and broad); 

Bow - ing 'neath the temp-ter's rod (the temp-ter's rod); 



is* 



*=* 



m 



w=^ 



& 



£=£ 



=P=P=^ 



IS: 



$: 



±>: 



:-3i 



* 



-ft- 



I- 1 — W * mt ~ 



X 

When the 
Soon I'll 
Joy for 



P P 



* 15" "p p p 

call to me is giv - en (it is giv 

soar thru starred ex-pan-sions (starred ex-pan- 

me will more than dou-ble (more than dou 

is & 4 s 

4> h f) 



P 

- en), 
sions), 

- ble), 



-J — d- 



:2: 



*=P 



*** 



^ 



P P P P P 



^=^: 



* 






W^L 



■qb 



X 

I'll go 

Go - ing 
In that 






& 



P P P 



tp-s: 



32= 



■*- h ft 

home to be with God (to be with 

home to be with God (to be with 

home to be with God (to be with 

-A = 1 *— 



^=p: 



£ 



:S: 



— p— P: 



d r> r> 



God). 
God). 
God). 



-A- 



H 




Chorus 



■H-H 



•^ is a a Is b 3 



3=s=*z= 



There's a bless-ed home, beau-ti-ful 

There's a bless-ed home, in a beau-ti-ful heaven, 



JO 



§# 



-*— *- 






Copyriglit, 1915. by James D. Vaughau Music Publisher, is Honored Guest." 



tKp-T ^ 



Going Home to Be with God 

h b » — *— &- 



*=±: 



* 



gjjg 



:gj=3=if 



^^ 



'~ 8 '" J j ' g g g ^ 



heav - en, In that Cit y high and broad; 

In that Cit y high and broad, s« high and broad; 




1^^ 



^^ 



•r 



$n 



$t 



as 



S5 



When the trumpet sounds and the message is gi? - en, 

When the trumpet sounds, giv-en, the message is 



P=^F 



apftg-p— ry-fz: 



-A — A A A A 



-k b: fe: fc" 



. p b b g zg=£ 






45=1 



3s: 



£=* 



I 



a±S= 



is: 



^z 



S 



3± 



i>.&'-* ~ p p i> U" T p D T" 

I'll go home to be with God. 

giv - en, I'll go home to be with God, to be with God. 

A A A --ni P b J> _f> I 



==£ 



Wt — i7" 



-9-fer 



?2=£=z£ 






^z=p: 



No. 103 Give Me Oil in My Lamp 



Unknown 



Arr. by Adger M. Pace 



igfo E-4-4 



PT* 



i5= 



ff 



? " " r-H «— « «J L-Bt 



at 



-ft— fc 



it 



"^r 



-#- *- 



3=2 



I 



1. Give me oil in my lamp, oil in my lamp, Give me oil in my lamp I pray; 

2. Give me joy in my soul, joy in my soul, Give me joy in my soul I pray; 

-#- -£- -f2- Hk- -k- -k- 



8@ : 4 = F = * : 



fcfc 



nzs: 



t=t 



± 



PP 



£^£ 



P=P: 



*: 



4-4 1— t 



1 — P— 9- 



V~V 



-Mt 



±=±1 



is: 



3=3 



:$=£ 



fefc 



*h- 



tJ*|p=3p±3=S=£ 



rtj= 



-ah 



P P 



Give me oil in my lam^, keep me shining in the camp, Un-til the break 
Give me joy in my pouI, hal-le - la-jaha then will roll, Uu-ial the break 



of day. 
of day. 



-?— t- 



z£=* E F F 



-r-fr- 



IHhf 



i 



£: 






m 



£=£ 



l£=tt 



:£-=£=££ 



fc=£ 



-P-P-P-P- 



No. 104. What A Singing That Will Be 

Mrs. J. C. Covington M. V. Moore 



taJULE 



m± 



:-l- 



3^: 



1. I'm on my way 

2. When life for me 
3. what a glad 



P P P 






S 



^F-s — 

to that fair clime, 
shall end be - low, 
and hap -py day, 



i=1 



S^zzzzfE 






to=^ : 



--£- 



J 



4 



?.(> 



*=£ 



-A Ifc— ■ 



^j±z±~— p 



:*z=^_ 



h_K_4>-, 



£ 



:=]: 



- a — £ : 



Where flow'rs are bloom 
And Je - sua calls 
When all the saints 



§31 



WE 



^— P— tr- p— p— *-^— ^- c p— p-Hj- 

oom 

ills 

lints 



i 



ing all the time, yes, all the time; 
for me to go, for me to go; 
get home to stay, get home to stay; 



r> h P 



— h — g — fe 



f=5 



— g- L t> 



§ 



4 



5 — ta_ 



/-" 



fe*E^ 



In that good land 

I want to join 

The sweet-est song 



TV 



r-J- 
^3- 



^ 



Christ is the King, 
thatheav-'nly throng, 
that e'er was known, 



~P P [> 



§^ m— g— ~ h— g 



fctert5=^t=|t 



1 — ^1— S 




■^: 






When I get there, 
And help to swell 
We'll glad -ly sing 



§te 



a 



f 1/ y ' 9 
Hispraisel'll sing, His praise I '11 sing, 
the glo-ry song,the glo - ry song, 
a- round the throne, a -round the throne. 

-i * — * * — a a — * — s — r - h — N — N K — N~« 



Chorus. 



^£=-* 



Ca — ■ 



-&-JT 



what a sing 






— 9 — a 



3C 



p P P 



1 



P P P P P 

ing that will be, 
what a sing -ing, what a sing -ing that will be, 



m^F^sr- 



s 



A * * A A A A — r * A A A A — -m 

2L-G — 5— 5=5— b:z-Eh=±EEi i, k E b^i 



=p=p=^=p=p=p= t ^=5 



Copyright .1945 by James D. Vsnehsn. Muolc PnbliBber.ln " Honored Guest. 



What A Singing That Will Be 



When we get home, 



V V 






and Je-sus see; 



When we get home, and Je -sus, bless -ed Je-sus see; 

* t?>. -K- :f: •£ IU. - •*■ 







With all that host 



With all that host in 
-*- -•• -0- -0 



-♦- 

in ju 

ju - bi - lee, in jo - bi - lee, 







what a sing 



EH 



HffiErEEE 



: K= 



ing that will be. 



what a sing- ing, what a sing- ing that will be. 

^ . ~a- -0~ . IS N j w f\ 

-#- -•- -♦• -»- ^h-__ -[-- -fi- -*- - »- - g - - -- - ♦• 

~E» ?» jg fei * S % r- 



_';S- 



2 * 



LSI 



No. 105. 

"WILLIAM COWPER. 



There Is A Fountain 



Western Melody. 




-A- -ja-«r-on ( 

1. There is a fountain filled with blood Drawn from Im-mannel's vein's, And sinners, plunged beneath that Hood, 

2. The dying thief rejoiced to see That fountain in his day; And there may I, tho' vile as he, 

3. Dear dying Lamb! Thy precious blood Shall never lose its pow'r , Till all the ransomed clmrch of God 

4. Then in a nobler, sweeter song, FUsing Thy pow'r to save, When this poor lisping staami'ring tongira 

A* A - -A- -A- _ „ A- -A- «^j -Ar-dr - A- p ^ I t <g - jfer~A-- A- -A- _ . -A- -A- 




-jfc-A--^ 

Lose all their guilty stains . Lose all their guilty stains, Lose all their guilty stains, 
Wash all my sins a-way, Washall my3ins a-way, Wash ali my sins a-way, 
Be saved to sin no more. Be saved to sin no more, Be saved to sin no more, 
Lie3 si -lent in thegrave.Lies si -lent in the grave, Lies si-lent in the grave, 

'I [> M ^^ 



No. 106 



Well! Glory 



Especially dedicated to Rev . C. C. IVilcutt, Birmingham, Ala. 
Adger M. Pace Marion W. Easterling 



fel 



S£±E£ 



h r> h 



-* 



£=4 



ft— ft— te M= fat=^- fi 



*-^r 






Q-W- 



1. Once in sin my Sav-iour found me, put Hi9 lov-iug arms a-round me; 

2. Of the things that long had grieved me, He so gra-cious-ly relieved me, 

3. Know-ing Him is such a pleas-urp, joy be-yond my heart to measure, 

D t> t) 



is* 



*v-4^ — ^— h j A ! ^ |» - 



:t: 



:p=£ 



« 



-P— F 



P P 



P P 



tai-vr-r- S 1 ft — fc- 



?k*f 



-fV 



£* 



r 



3= 



+ 



j 



igB 



P ^ b^b D I 
Well, glo - ry to His ho - ly name; v v 

Well, glo-ry to His ho - ly name, to His pre-cious name. 

■A A A A A— 

1 1 1— 1 



It 



!*=£ 



p V > 



-3BE F Efc=*-£ 



^=thz^^^ 



I b 



kfe— &-jte£ =±z=fr: 



ft — ft—fr 



£=* 



=F 



-*-*■ 



ft": 



t-^i- 



Giv-ing me His par - don sweet-ly, and to-day, I'm saved com-plete-ly, 
Now for Him I'm dai - ly liv - ing, all my serv - ice to Him giv - ing, 
That is why I keep on sing -ing this sweat song, while bells are ring-ing, 

P ft A A A A A r * A A A A ~$r- 



§sS 



-*— I- 



: 9= 



'-9— F F F 1 F 1 1 1 is K — \- ■ K «■ 

jl_ i? p F2— 3— * — p s— E= k— E-4)H^— ^— fr 

n n n k " 



¥= 



£« 



P P P 



-^--fn 



> - 1 iwi! 4 — fr y 



p^ p 



* 



§£ 



Well, glo - ry, to His ho - ly name. Y 

Well, glo-ry to His ho-ly name, to His pre-cious name. 



*=p 



r 



CH9 RPS ft ft ft ft 



U UM4 



XS- 



^ 



>f U^ ^ 



-• ' P- 



=r 



ell, glo-ry, sweet sto - ry, . 

Glo-ry to His same, since He free-ly came, 



i&gg 



£ 



^m 



tefc 



pro 



Copyright. 1916, by James D. Yaughaa lluiic PublUher, in Honored Gaoit. ' 



Well! Glory 



S 



53 



^ 



*-* 



rr 



"P" y v p 

And thru love has saved me and has set my heart a-flame (set my heart a-flame) ; 

* * h _w_ * 3t :?:&> 



S5e 



£=S 



£ 



a — |^_t|i=£z=i4_i4_kz:)i: 



-+ 



=P=£ 



■$=$=£ 



P P P P b b b b 



rtr 



n J r>i ft-K-b-E-fr 



* 



1 



3- 



9=4 



-^— »- 



"** 



While the bells within me chime and ring, this song for-ev-er I will shont and sing, 

^ . ± — ± — y — ^_ 



fel=a=^g 



p — pztj£~ltz:tez:fc=l£: 

b b b b p 



IE 



±t 



^ * 



P P P 



v- 



m. 






F» 



-fe- 



te 



3~]>A f = ^l 



Z33 



A A 



-^r 



r 



F 



■* 



P b b P 

Well, glo - ry to His ho - ly name, v 

Well, glo-ry to His ho - ly name, to His pre-cions name. 



I 



fcfcfcs: 



:£=£=£ 



* 



¥=q 



£ 



r 



No. 107 

S. F. Adams 



Bethany 



m 



& 



Lowell Mason 



HPi 



3 



i 



sx 



3 



-2?" 



-5^r^- 



» '^4 



1. Near - er, my God to Thee, 

2. Tho' like a wan-der-er, 

3. There let the way ap-pear 



SS 



F t 



Near-er to Thee! E'en tho' it be a cross 
Day-light all gone, Dark-ness be o- ver me, 
Steps nn- to heaY'nj All that Thau sendest me, 



-* £*- 



:k— k-k- 



_*3_5_*=3_>* 



Kg -^- tsy - g - 






Fine. 



r ^4 



q: 



D. &— Near - er, my God to Thee! 
D. S. 



~&. ' ^^ 4-t-fii 



^= 



43 3 ^. : 



•a-^r- 



T:^ ' ♦ '^ -gz^-i— ^ 



That rais-eth me! Still 

My rest a stoae, Tet 
In mer-cy gir'n; An- 



• P' » g - 



i 



i-& 



:|==E 



all say songs shall be, Near-er, my God to Thee! 
in «ay dreams I'd be, Near-er, my God to Thee! 
gels to beck - on Rie, Near - er, my God to Thee! 



2s: 



I: 



£ 



p^ 



tt=ti 



' I -1 
Near-er to Thee! 



No. 108 Over On the Hills of Glory 

Adger M. Pace Minzo C. Jones 




m — • — • — v — * v — *■! «- 



d d 



1. O-ver on the hills of glo-ry fair, in the land of joy be - yond com-pare, 

2. O-ver on the hills of glo-ry land, rnan-y now are joined both heart and hand, 

3. O-ver on the hills of glo-ry sweet, mil-lions now are fiud-ing joy com-plete, 

-t— j^->_ *_*— jh — t — w — >>: — ► — 



rf=2=«=J=2=i=^ 



$^=gzg=gz£:=g=£zzg 



-k k Ik k— k k k k k- 

•r-rr-rtr- D i> iTT 



£--*- 



H$=k 



ft 



I si "si zh ,-ii ; 



^3 



-gj if 



zzatzat 



=*=* 



t 



•j -*- -«■- -*--#- j 5 13 P b 13 

Where the hap - py an-gels all sweet-ly sing (they sweet-ly sing) glad prais-es, 
Sing - ing out the sto-ry of Je-sus' love (His pre-cious love) and mer - cy; 
Wor - ship-iug the Sav-iour there on His throne (His roy- al throne) in heav-en; 

-BS R -L s-. ■- 



7-5 A 1» * * * * 

lei] & Lt A A A & 



=P=P 




Un - to Christ the Sav-iour, on His throne, a3 He rul - eth o - ver 
Tell -ing how for them He free - ly died, on the cru - el tree was 
Look-ing on His ten - der sinil-ing face, prais-ing Him for His re- 

A A * A A * A A , ^ ^ *• K £> V— 



3=^= £=3= 



=F=£ 




-&-& 



^ — 2~~ er~ ?~F 






g 



"• d i b V l> [5 f 



all His own, While the bells of heav - en sweet - ly ring 

sweet - ly ring, are ring - ing. 

cru - ci - tied, And has bro't them safe-ly home a - bove 

home a - bove, re - joic - ing. 

deeming grace, Know-ing one an-oth-er as th»y're knuwn 

as they're known, what glo - ry. 



fe 



tr-tr 

Chorus 
-k-fe 



£=£ 



l b l ft h r> i) i 



g=g=£=g=£=S: 



^ 



?=tefefes 



r~y * * zm. 



-*»—*- 



T P |> — * — * • — L M a M m 

b P D 






MP 

Yes, o-ver on the hills of glo-ry, some sweet day, 

O-ver on, on the hills with Je - su9, 

_k — k — k — k * — a — .•* 



=S 



tqt* 



e^-g—Ag l-5 in 5 5 D B 



— , — , , — , — — _ H — , — 

-*. — w — k — * — y F K K 



Copyright, 1015, by Jamos 1> YatiiUau, Kusie Publisher, in Honored Guoet 



Over On the Hills of Glory 
— ^ — I 



$=£: 



-fi— =1 — «- 



tt 



i 4 — =1- 



=r=» 



1=* 



b b p 



p p p 

I shall join that hap - py ransomed band 

Shall be there and shall join up yon-der; 



-1-g-g 



fe=3=g=gzS=3=± 



+=-^F — F — F — F=P- 



3=£=£ 



4^= P P £ 



-=i — «- 



£ 



b b p" 



b b b 



1 — r^? — fv 



»- F 



I n p 



Prais - ing Him who bro't me all the way, 

Praising Him, praising Him hal- le -lu - jah, 

:t — t — w_ — k — k — * , 



:£=£=*: 



S^=^i=i=p- 



v=& 



=F=S 



p p b t> 



£-^- 



r= ?=^— ft— M 



r .^ | Lq— jg 



In - to that e - ter - nal glo 



& r 



55— — a — ^ — £ — £ — *- 



P P 

- ry - land 

glo - ry - land up yon-der. 

. d , b t) \) ■ f) i 



I 



— * — p — = 



1-g- 



T= 



No. 109 

John Newton 



Amazing Grace 



William Walker 






5ZCZSI 



:^: 



§g 



1. A - maz - ing grace how sweet the sound, That saved a wretch like me; 
2.'Twas grace that taught my heart to fear, And grace my fears re - lieved; 

3. Thru man - y dan -gers, toils, and snares, I have al-read-y come; 

4. When we've been there ten thou-sand years, Bright shin-ing as the sun; 




—^t- 1 — s — R-^d H — l- 



once was lost but now I'm found, Was blind but now I see. 

How pre - cious did that grace ap-pear, The hour I first be-lieved. 

Tis grace that brought me safe thus far, And grace will lead me home. 

We've no less days to sing God's praise, Than when we first be - gun. 



e 



F=e 



a: 



t=t 



a 



No. 110 

A. M. P. 



Come Back Home 




Adger M. Pace 

-&- 



■fr-fr 



you have had with- 

that you used to 
that was in your 



i 



1. Have you lost the ,oy 

2. Have you lost tha song 

3. Have you lost the peace 



jfqS-fH*— f 






fcfcfc 



W=Z 



-g- 



Zfcz* 



b p p p 




it 



gN^ 



a 



*■ — p- 

in, Are you bur-dened dowa 

sin?, Does the Word ring out 

breast When you found the Lord, 



with a load of 
with a pleas - ant 
and His love pos- 




v o b V 

sin (vrith a load 
ring (with a pleas 
se3sed(and Hi3 love 



V 
of 

ant 
pos- 



-m 
P 

sin)? Ask the Lord to help, 
ling)? Give the Lord a chanca 
sessed)? Just re- turn to Him, 



^| 






:t! 



^ 



P P P 




=s3: 






± 



-$=4—\£ 



He will bear your 
at your heart to ■ 
for Hii raer - cy 



cry, Just be - lieve His 

day, He will bring you 

plead, He will save your 

P 



£E£ 



iw^h 



±n 



: f ?: 



9 V v 



^=* 



h-r 



=^£ 



m 



§> 



^g 



3t=^q 



* 



— # 



word, 

back 

soul, 

f t 



TTTTT 

and He will draw nigh (and He will draw 
to the old-time way (to the old-time 
and sup - ply your need (and blip - ply your 



S&E 



nigh), 
way), 
need). 



H 






-3= 



rrtz^zzpzrp: 



|-0~r-p- 



Coiyrikht, 1845. bj Junius D Vaujbaa Music FublUksr, ia "Honored Quest." 



Come Back Home 



M 



Chorus 



a a & * 



^g% 



& 



f=E=g=^ 



gj=4±Z3t 



-p- 

Broth - er, eome back home, 



for the Sav - ionr 
Turn a -way from your sins, for the Sav - ionr 



fc£ 



fcft: 



Sfcfe 



^ 



^=5= 



i*=E 



:£=£ 



$C=d 



N^-^-i 



V 



hfifer 



£=£ 



-MBF=^t^+ 



live, He will give you joy 

live, for the Sav-iour live, 



SgBEEg 



¥=£ 



=£ 



Won-der-ful joy with-in 







P b b^p p p 

that the world can't give; Ev - 'ry need you 

that the world can't give, that the world can't give; 



fc^=^ 



1 t> ]>■ P 



5: 



-ri P- 



-n- 






i^zz^j 



-p=^=p=; 



have, He will sat - is - fy And yon will re 

Ev-'ry need you have, He will sat - is - fy, 

b 



A A A — A ft- 






4= 



S3 



F 



-W -K-K— K 



.-5- 



b p p p 



b b 



H=±c 



it=|_l 5=±2St" 




%&£ 



5=S 



e 



P P P P p 

joiee in the by asd by 

And you then will re-joice in the by and by, ia the by and by. 

* i J ji i J> 






J=£ 



1= 



ffl^35^ 



-P P '-A " 



No. Ill We Shall Rise and Sail Away Home 



Millard A. Glenn 



£ 



* 



$=3: 



&_&— & &_ 



B. F. White 



:&=& 



£=«r 



8* 



4 



3= 



-<— jH 



£=* 



:=3= 



1. On that glo - ry hal - le - lu - jah morn-ing, When our Sav-iour shall 

2. At the sound-ing of the trum-pet yon - der, Love for Him will keep 

3. That will be a day of great - est glo - ry, Let us tell it in 



&A 






- *ft'Jj g 



it 



£zr=E=t="E 



£=£ 



ft— ft— ^ 



6 ft ft b 



=j 



3t=4 



= V- 1 — £ 



FF= 



come with-out warn-ing, We shall all rise with Him and sail a - way 
grow-ing more fond - er, Kise with Him and sail a - way, 



song and in sto - ry, 



-i -J>U 



£=£fe 



%=* 



i * * a ■ ■ ■ — m 



b=£ 



p p u 



£=e^ 



-W& — f 5 — t 



3 — r~a a! -' ii a! * aI aI a I 



fe 



y d i b ts i * * 

home; All of heav - en will be with Him, sing - ing, 

sail a-way o-verhome, All the sleep -ing of the Lord, re - joic - ing, 

All His chil-dren will be there to meet Him, 

■P--P-V fr fi f- f - L ^ u ft 1 &. 






1H^ 



3 



£=£ 



IL;I 



£=£ 



ta=^==ft=rfe: 



-ft ft— £ 



i 



m =* 



#=£ 



And the glo - ry bells all will be ring - ing, We shall all 

Will come forth with His prais - es all voic - ing, 

And with shout-ing they glad - ly will greet Him, 

-P- -P- _ -P- -P- -p- -p- -&- -m- -#- -»- -P- 




rise with Him and sail a - way home 

Rise with Him and sail a - way, sail a - way 

JJ 



o - ver home. 



^Lt 



4=— t £ 



1=1= 



J».J> J **J> 



* 



g 



13 



Copyright, 1945, by James D. Vaujrhan, MuBic Publisher, in Honored Guest. " 



We Shall Rise and Sail Away Home 

Chorus ^— _ * h e h s 



r=^ 



^*i 



We shall rise and sail a - way with the Sav - iour, Go - ing up 

1 u • »- -0- -m- -f- •*- -j— -p ^ 



* 



3=£ 



-r- 



zfej:=£=£=ftz=ti 



•; -" .$- -$. -0. a 

home to live in His fa - vor, Hap - py for - ev - er in the glo - ry- 



t- t- 



:£-*, 



♦ i » 



v — [~g 



£ 



%=r=r 



^=^ 



* h 



S b b 



a==fczfc 



B p P — 5 



g 



g — sr 






^M 



S 



=*j*- 



.^. 



Ht*— «-+ 



±t=j= 



-&-&- 



-AHfc, 



$ i i \nnrwffj 



— a — *- 

-#d — =r 



land, His prais-es to sing; What a day of re- 

prais-es,glad happy praise there to sing, Hallelujah! 



tfcih 



.VL) '• j — :M =£ 



. .«- -|9L JL 






J5I 



.&— a is !> =£=£-$>- 



r=i 



* 



-pm 



-r 



"si iSi~ 



joic - ing, When we get o - ver there, we'll be voic - ing Won - der - ful 



w. 



* 



p^ 



£=£ 



3=p= 



-y- 



f 



-r 



# 






:*e£ 



CT 



£— P*- 



praise to our Re-deem-er, Christ, our Sav-iour and King. 

our Saviour, Lord and our King. 



r -r fr. k f 



IT TT FTT1 W W< Us— 



m 



-* A A A 14- 



fo a j | g-£— u— 5— g=fe=# 



No. 112 



Let Me Dream of Heaven 



T. M. L. 



T. Mosie Lister 




m 



3: 



1. I am tossed on an o - cean of sor - row, By the an - gry and 

2. Let me dream of a bright-er to-mor-row, When the shad-ows have 

3. At the sound of the trump-et some morn-ing, With my tri - als ' all 



r r 



m 



r p r 



fi=k 



i=£=k=fc: 



-ft 8 fl p T p — p 



p i v | f j — ft 



rfe 



l£ 



*£=f5 



£=£ 



fcfc 



* 



i=£&dte» 



^t— ti- 



mer - ci - less tide, With the wind and the rain beating 'round me, And with 
all passed a - way; Let me dream of that beau-ti - ful Cit - y, Where the 
van-ished a - way, I will go to that Cit - y with Je - sus, And with 



H 



£ 



■#— * — P- 



m 



4=z 



^ r p « p 



j*. 



t 



IS- A ft ft 



K=^=^=fc 



gjH» 



p p p 



fc£±s 



f 



-fcM 



«t 



P P P 



P P 






=* 



^ 



*=£=* 



^-^ 



'J - - p - - p 

dark - ness on ev - er - y side; But I fear not the black-est of 

saved shall be hap-py al • way; 'Tis a place of e - ter - nal fe- 

Him I for - ev - er shall stay; But un - til He shall bid me come 



^ ^_U_; zr|fe==^_ £_fe _ LJ i 



fcz b p p _ ^_ fa 



•t" f if" — P 



fc=H=|fc 



3*=£ 



t£=P=p: 



E -P B, 



fck 



-E r rt — fr 



EE£ 



f> i) 6 „ r> 



:&=& 



-i 



* 



3= 



*=ft 



3=Z 



-*— 



tem - pest, I can see home lights shin- ing for 

joic - ing, And of sing - ing God's prais - es a - 

high-er,_ Let me see ia my vi - sions His 

.a. 4*. 



me, And un- 
bove, While I'm 
face, Un - til 







§? 



til I shall anchor some raoro-ing, Let me dream of the 
wait-ing and long-ing to see it, Let me dream of its 
I shall be-hold Him in glo - ry, Let me dream of that 

-A* -A" -*- x-n "A" 

r t- t~ ,t~ * f ?—* ,1~ f — f*~ 



3H* 



glo-ries I'll see. 
glo - ry and love, 
won-der-ful place. 



i 



_RZZi& 'A-.jA.IZjL. 



1?^—t-t-%-± E t^:^t=i+h=rfrEMM* 



E£ 



P P P P P P 

Copyright, 1945, by Jams* D. Yaujlmn. Music Publisher, in Honorod Guost ' 



-p-tr-p- 



SE 



Chorus 



Let Me Dream of Heaven 

^ 



$=*= 



-=r 



$: 



± 



Jt 



tofc 



T 



r 



p P 



i p 



iTTT 



-r 5 b i ^ w p 

Let me dream . . of heav-en, ... let me dream of glo - ry di- 

Let me dream, dream of heav-en, dream of its 



tbtx 



m 



-*{- 



p p 



r> P> £ P - r 



±=3: 



*£&- 



±- 



£=£t 



m* 



-«— 



±r 



-»~#M 



% p b \>% 



' D b 

vine, Let me dream ... of beau-ties and a mansion that 

glo-ry di-vine, Let me dream, dream of its beauties, home 



#-4= 



-A- -A- -A- 



sfc& 



fc 



•4JZZIA A. 



=*— c 



t3=p= p-p- p: 



-3- 



$=$q£ 1 ^-frfr 



-* «'w » - 



$: 



P P p i"- 



TV 



-P— 4k- 



D pT 7 



soon 
that 

-A- 



will be mine; I can see home lights bum-ing, . . I am 

soon will be mine; I can see horns lights burning, 

-F- #- -m- m _ _ 



£ 






k k !■ 



FiFV 



-=|- 



-#— q- 



:^ 



*: 



trp-p- 



I 



± 



^EE 



<H>— fv 



£ 



fr— tV 



-fV-V 



gf- 



r 

on 

on 



t I? 



-T |jr 



! l> 



my last wea - ry mile, But nn - til Je - su8 

my last long wea-ry mile, But nn-til 



■&- 



I 



£fc2: 



SH 



pirr 



f=TT 



P P 



to: 



xs: 



J: 



#=T 



-3 — « i-J 

X 1 J 



r 



t^^nroT 



^s 



calls 
Je - 



me, let me dream of heav-en for a - while 

sus calls me, dream of heav'n dream en for a-while. 



- p p p 



F^ 



-\rv p- 



i 



P p n-t» 



1 



No. 113. God's Message of Love 



D. C. W. 








^ 


David C. Wray 


%e£=£=J_J 










-W-Hn 


Sir v a ■■ E =i- 

1. Tbe Sav-iour came down 

2. While trav- el - ing up 

3. This mes -sage of love, 


zcz 


5 


— • * — 


c 


— • ■* -J ^ — : 

. from heav - en a - 
the Cal - va - ry 
so pre - cious to 

— 1 ■ H 1 1 

— !te k * 


W 4- J « 




=fe 


= ^- 


44= 


4= 






-1- 



^=3r=E==:=z= 



p M 3 C ^ n x ' p B 

bove, from heaven a- bove,And brought to this world 

road, the Cal - va - ry road, He car -ried His cross, 

me, so pre -cious to me, Has cov-ered the world, 



iTf 



55=t 



|£- 



-h- 



b .0 P 






-^- 



=^f 



-fcr-fch: 



-9 -*- 


-r— p— J"— 











"£=^- 


-fc- 

-al- 


=£ 




8Hh 

a 

oh, 

'tis 


mes - sage of 
what a great 
mak - ing men f 

F L [* 


-# — 

love, 

load, 

ree, 

_3> 

jfe 


p 

a 

oh, 
'tis 

-*- 


mes - sage 
what a 
mak - ing 

a h — 

— 1 F 


P 

of 

great 
men 
— a — 


love;Wher 

Ioad;The 

free; So 

P 
I 

i . *i 


- ev 
sins 
let 


-er 
of 
us 


He 

the 
go 


— tr- 




L u 


P 


" l P 


t, 


U 1 


««< 




J 




found the sick and the blind, the sick and the blind, 

world there on Him was laid, there on Him was laid, 

forth and tell it a - gain, and tell it a - gain, 



~~& (8. 






^ — P — ^ — 6J — p — t? 



_ h h ft 



jE 



iUr±=^ 



r 



U l> fcj b P b 



He bealed them with pow'r, so ten-der and kind,so ten • der and kind. 

The price of it all so free-ly He paid.so free - ly He paid. 

How Je-sus onrLord, for sin-nerswas slain,for sin -ners was slain. 



w_:3 g~~ 



-A- 



:ft"- #. 



BE 



^S 



raze 



Oofjrlsrht, 1945. by Junes D. Vaoshan, Moale Publisher, in "Honored Gocet.' 



r* 



1 



Chorus! 



- s h- *- 



-=F 



God's Message of Love 



£ 



j . 1 ! *=_ 

_3 * . 






This message of love, God's wonderful love, 

This message of love, God's won-der-fullove, 

ct 1 X — — r^ — * — ■ — w— ■> — * — 5 — g r^l— v 



fe : Ef 



-» P, » 



-A- 



P P 



_A_A • = A- 



b u 



£-^f> 



z^Q=fcJ= 



Bro't to earth one day, 
Bro't to earth one day, by the Sav - iour a 



~F 



HI 



-* 



S— 3 — 3 — d — " — • — 1 — s 



^ b tJ 



3 — al- = ap-i|— *— a— 



•r b t> 



"tr 



bove, 



2=9 



by the Saviour a - bove;'Tismak-ing men free 

K K & fo h P 
K) Kj_ -A- -A -A- -A 



'Tis mak-ing men free 



pz: :i=gzz»_ z — — . 



p — - 

:|s=|i:=!i— k — a__ 



-=1 £- 



35=0- 



D — t 



D p 

wher-ev - er 'tis heard, 



P 7 s " 



« B # = a 



pis 

So let it ring 



wher - ev - er 'tis heard, 



F^rr 



;g=i 



=j*=|s: 



"0 ^ — P — t? 



— *\— ^ — — - j 



t— esl- 



^— p— ^— ^— p— P 



-* si — w — *l — ■ — hzd- 



:z^=: 



out, 



So let it ring out, 
N _ _ IN 
-^S B h ■ 



p p b .b p y 

Till na - tions are stirred, till na - tions are stirred. 

. -a- m h h )r/ fr.j h 



r=EE^;g=iEE^EE^=g=g^^^^=EEE^lEB 



No. 114. The Heavenly Jubilee 



Chas. H. Huff 



Mm 



— * 



taM 



Will L. Matthews 



$=r 



mmmm 



1. When we gath-er on the bills oi glo -ry, singing with the saints the grand old 

2. Ma- ny will be therefrom ev-'ry nation, who have been re-deemed by great sal* 

3. It will be a great and grand re- un-ion, all to-geth-er there in 6weet com" 



i — "3~^~ t" " t~~ t~ p~~ *~~ *~~ r== T~~ *T P ~ p 



-a- 
SEE 



BrE 



Pfc 



r-r-rr-p-p-trir 



fcfeE&zfcts: 



i 



*=* 



$F 



sto -ry, Praising eur Re-deemer , Saviour, Je-3us,liv -ing in His fa-vor, 
va-tion, Sing-ing in that hap- py cho-rus, tell-ing of the love vic-tor-ious, 
munion, Standing by the throne 'twill please us, looking on the face of Je-sns, 

v -r-» g ' H- — 9 ' - -. 



n 







-» — ^ — S — 



g££l 



...ESEEEfElEfc 
UP LP 

We will have a glorious _ Millions will be 

That has bro't thorn to that ju - bi - lee,ju - bi - leejfor-ev er; On the glory 
We will have a bap-py N There with all the 

p p- P P ^ 

£ h K :-r-fc-4 b b h K & &— & 



P P P 

) L J B 1 m jj. H-HB H B » B p=J B 1 jj B — 



P= 



<£+*=# 






there, and glad to meet us, with a hap-py smile of love will greet us, 
hills of rest e - ter - nal, hal - le - lu -jah songs will ring eu-per-nal, 
friends who'vo gone be -fore us, with the blessed Sav-iour reign-ing o'er as, 



-a. -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -m- _, -A- -A- 

^=:tz=:^z=?z=^z=:.t=&= E t:=t=:t=t=:tz=E=P=g = =t=^. 

fclfp — 14 — & 1* ife It A — H 1 1 b 1 te * " — h — h— 




:£=£=£: 



Tf 



fe*= 






£=£ 



P=t2=: 






Glo-ry will be all a -round us, heaven tru - ly will astound us, 

Crowning our r*-deem-er, Saviour, praising His e ter- nal fa-vor, 

Glo-ry will be ours for- ev - er, sing-ing by the crvs-tal riv - er, 

*1 **• - 1 *- jk. 1 



.a. .a. i j_: .a. i 

p — to — » — » — « — c » — r " — p — ■ — m — ■* 

^pEEEg=^PzEp^g^BEpHEEE ^Efe ^ 



rfaczj^r 



Coprriskt. J94S. by Jmnea D, Vo»«h«n. Mnolc PohllBher. In "flonered Gueet.' 



S 



ffiSEgEfESEgSEjES! 



The Heavenly Jubilee 

. — ^ K Choeus. i 



=£=£=*=£ 



-b-r 



FP- 



rm 



::S 



Glo 

Gb-ry in the 



It will be a 

On that happy day of vie -to - ry,vie -to- ry. 

On that happy It will be glo 

.a- -m- A- „ » -A- *- X | J h fc b fc fc) 



=tF^j=45|=fr 



b u P fc 5 P b £ 

der 



3£^£ 



ry o-ver yon 

King-dom, glo-ry o-ver yonder wlien we gath-er on the hills e-ter-nal, 
ry yon - der 



?S§^ 



r> n 



J*ij> 



h h 



:=£ 






.A. -A- -A- _ 

:f=zi — ! — t==r=g 

-ifc !4 Lfc — A t& A 



singing the songs of vie - to - ry, vie - to-ry; 



-fr-q— g — F- — 



H-i-t 



Join 
Join the mighty 
And we will join 



_ _ -A- -A- 



a=t— p: 



-A- -A- 



-14 14 14 — 14— \~ 



F— 

b 



&_*L_S 



^ 



-* J-XJt 









b b tf P tf P S J 

the mighty cho - rus, 

cho • rus, hal -le - lu-jah cho-rus, o - ver in that hap-py home su- 

the cho - rus, 



h 



iffl 



*t 



* ' j4 ; J ' J4 h h 



KSBEEE 



*= 



? H- — 4 — H 



.A. _A_ .4. 

# — *~r # — * — f — g — g — | 1 1 — 

4 p4 14 £ 4 14 4 4 i4— 



dz^ == t5====F^=^ 



* ~ 



per -nal, Glo 



aL^= $ = 



— i — 



hap-py and free. 



ff— g=Eg=t2:=£ 



ry, glo-ry, 
Glo-ry, glo-ry, glo-ry, we'll be 

At* .4. .4. .4. V -A- -A. .m. IT^ J 

— •— nt — # — — r # — • — » — •- m — • - 



No. 115. 

Jesse B. Hardin 



Just A Little While 



Mrs. Jesse B. Hardin 



*=k 



£=*: 



=$=&: 



g^^fegg^^ 



^_|_^_^ : -^±tg f _5_^=J!z|(: 



1. There's a train that runs to glo - ry, heav-en's fair e - ter-nal clime, It is 

2. All we need to do my broth -er, ii we hope to ride this train, Is be- 

3. All who ride this train to glo - ry, must befree from ev- ! ry sin, And be 

A A r Ai ▲ A r A-— A A A A— A , 

-i~A A — HA- — A A A A A A A— |-A^ -A A A A h^-R 

>— p— ry- 1 M— b>— 



-A A — hA- — A {A A A A A A— HA* —A- 



-frfr-b— §-}y£—£— fm^ — h- 


-fri 


-$ -k-P *P-A- 


.. *n 


/ ^i_J,__§Ll«_s| — J _e« — j_ 


— 4 — br H r ' 1 1 r 


— =ft— =ts_d 


t) 


tH 7 * ^ 


stand-ing at the sta-tion, and 


may leave most an - y time 


; There's no 


lieve up - on the Sav-iour, Christ, 


the Lamb for sin -ners slain; 


Walk with 


sane - ti - fied com-plete - ly , with 


a per - feet heart with - in; 


Keep their 


-k- -k- -k- -k m 






„ , "- tr t t' p a a 
@dz_k- t t t Y t b 


-A-q 

— m — 


..A A »_ 

-■- — P 1 1 »- 


T— S— 


^ V * * I ^— {> 


-& : 


-Pi » P P 1— 


— u ^ — 



5EffejE^=£=a 



5E* 



^=^-^: 



1* 



#= ; 



TTR 



fare to pay my broth -er, long a - go the fare was paid, Thru the 
Him in all your liv - ing, let Him have His way with you, Get a- 
faith a - lone in Je - sus, nev - er fal - ter, nev - er frown, Till they 

Ai _ A A A^— A A A A .A A_„ 

■I 1 1 1 1 r-l 1 ♦ * k P. ^- 

, 14 ,, W *_ -Ri-» R p 1 p fr- 



-A- A A A A A A A — hA-=- — A- 

tr - 1 — 1> — P — p — p— p — prf 



*>— fcffc 




Chorus. 






k K N k CHORUS. 



SiT? 



blood of our Re-deem-er, res - er - va -tion has been made. 

board this train for glo -ry, andyou'll ride the whole way thru. Just a lit 

reach the heav'nly sta-tion and re-ceive the vic-tor : s crown. 

-k- -k- -k- ^ 

t~ f — fc A— A_:P_A A_ r Ai_A A ■ 



EJE 



t2=t^=t2=U 



, A A_ --_ , , _ . 

t • • P P — r-#- — • • 9 • — 



tie 



fth - ;;*^44a&W-J J ' * _ _ _.| 

* > i y. C C; p p p 5 r^ 

while and we'll be go -ing, head- ed for the pearl - y gate, Go - ing to a 

-k- -k- -k- -k- m 

dfc=Bzzt£= 



is 



F= 



:=z=^=^-.tp=fci=pz=:p 



A *^ 

r — 



Copyright, 1946 by James D. Vaaffban. Muaic PubliBher, In " Honored Gnest, 



jusc m uiccie wnne 



x j> ]r r*=$=M 



TT$ 



Z ^~l 



=,=,=, 



b=g=j=3= E 



=1 



5 v $ v 



home where floiv'rs are grow-ing, and our loved ones for us wait; As we ride a 
A — A- .,-= a — a— A — s — 

EiE § :=i»z=gdiczife— Ezzgz=fc= g — 



-P— P^-tp— ri— t?— tr 



i 



TT^ 



^ a — a — Y±t— ttj- — * — - x 

' g— z m *—a — h" — flj a ' 



£— I 



—5 ^ -t- r^=^ -=I ^M =^ 



pn> c k 



tL_C- 

♦I— 



s 



long we'll sing the sto - ry of our great con - duct - or true, On this 

4 g — X j= A -j» i» — t'—-] 

I m g * * ^i 1 -fe. P » £ » J 



Coda 



E9 — ■— » — ■ — ■ — w — ■ — *■ — ■— i-gr— -i— *— 3— -jzzri — 9 — » — -P- 
train that runs to glo - ry, and we mean to ride it thru. Just a lit - tie 
n , £'. »■ — i—'-'—^—t — ■* — A— ,-A-^.— A — A— » r 



\T 



=P 



3i 



--P — A A A M-HtSs- 



4= 



9 

Just a lit - tie while, 



— tf — C 



tr- tr~ tr 




it will not be long, 

-k- -k- -k- -k- -k- -k- 

r -|r_ir:_tz-r ■-*-■ 1- 



;-. s fa t #\-4- 



^£— * 



Till we join the ran 



i=^-^-t- 



— i-, 

— * 



_ a B - 

~u — 5 — 5 — ^ — P" 



somed throng. 
,n-somed thr 

*- -k- 

t^fr__-!r_:|=i_ r 



Till we join the ran-somed throng, join the ransomed throng. 

V ft ft h n I 

-r- -F- -k- ^_ A. A. z^i :?" «- 



f -*- 

■= — • — » — » — » — • 



r 



Fay Wallington 



rrj 



} MM-U^^ m 



1. Since I let my Sav-iour come in, 

2. Oh, what joy and glo-ry is mine, 

3. As with Him I trav-el a- long, I'm hap-py 



-v 

all 



James D. Walbert 
day long, 



all the day long, 

rs in 

A_ 



n=4T = 4=l = \T~ fc — < — j=t=^=: F ^ — f= =: 

^^=p=P=£=^=|=£=Ls=^— ^=^=5=S=p=^ 



■^-jMft- 






hal-Ie-lu-jah,Sav-ing me from ev-'ry known sin, I now can sing a new 
Walking up the heav-en -ly line, 
Knowing that to Him I be -long, glad new 



ft ft A. A jl A Jk- a .A- -A- -^ 



is^^= 



-t==F 



PS 



5=-Pz£P=5-p-|zzP=^z 



:F= 



»g gEzt=q» 



!EfeiEfe 



i§l 



song; 



Prais-ing Him, my heav-en - ly King, for His great 
Light of love is shin-ing on me all day, and 
song, to His hon-or; And some day I'll meet Him a -bove.when this short 



g ,K — 




* 



— p- 

5S 



■« — « — ♦ — ♦( — ♦ — 3 — « i — 



mer- cy and love.nev- er end - ing, Dai- ly lift-ing me up-ward 
thru the long night, with its ra-diance,Mak-ingbright-er my path-way 
jour-ney is o'er, hap-py meet- ing, Live with Him in His glo-ry, 



j-g- g = - g-^- = - 



= ft p h r f^ 



to sweet heav-en a-bove. Oh, I am hap - py, 
to that Cit - y of light. hap - 

on that beau-ti - ful shore. The road is clear - er, 

clear - 

-IBL. 



oh, so 



py now, 



and my 



er now, 



:£ = t=P======t=3i===t==:===p=5:= 



Uoprrirfm. 1945, by James D. Vang-hon, Music Publisher. Id •'Honored Guest. 



I'm Happy Now 



-b_4u-fc_b 



: ^=^=^^ 



«E-^-3- 



-*: 



3 



f t P ' J 

won-drous-ly hap-py, Andsweet-ly sing - ing, 

I'm hap-py now, Sing - ing now, 

Sav-iour grows dear-er, As I go on - ward, 

grows dear-er now, On - wardnow, 



m 



— I m — — a — » 



=25. : 



w&$ 



-3= 



~~~~v z * x 



¥=$ : 



=f5=^=^==t5=3=M== F 3: 



:3=^==«=fe 



IS 



as 



of the Sav-iour I'm sing- ing, I'mhav-ing glo - ry, 

He taught me how, Glo - ry, 

in His light I go on- ward, Amd when He calls me, 

light on my brow, Calls me, 



:t=r 



: P=£=5=P 



1 1 s- 






--! 4 ^ A * L 



F=,=s=^=p=t&=F : 



=fE 



5Trr 



yes, won -der-ful glo-ry, While here I'm liv - ing, _ 

here, great glo-ry here, Liv - ing 

to glo - ry He {Omit) 
there, 
-I 



fiBa ■ — 1 § P — - — g=g — *-^ f— ^ — — 



;re, 



and my serv-ice I'm giv - ing; 



calls me, 
to Him so dear; He calls me there, 
IN 



for i; -i/ g ===5^^g==g4tpg=g=^ 






h h M > 



i=zstziz=5: 



^L 



Jui 



p P P U P I 

I'll for - ev - er be hap - py 

be hap-py there, 



fes^^j 



r 



S5 



*=f 



-i— 



VP ^ - 



to live with Him there. 

Ike vrith Him up there. 



3— s- 



m. 11 j. 

Geo. W. R. 



U1K Willi J^sus 



Geo. W. Kambo 






1. When temp-ta - tions round you gath-er, 

2. Lay your all up - on the al - tar, 

3. When the host of sin sur -round you, 




draw - ing you a - 
go to Him in 
and you've lost your 

«—- Bk — *— bk 

l*=k= t=rt=: 

p — I — I — t — 



f • r 

part, a - part, 
prayer, in prayer 
song, your song, 



— d — — J 3 -- h— P--J-H— j— J- 

L^ ^ A J ^| A L^ A 



When your pathway lies in shadows, 
When your form is grow-ing wea - ry 
When the things oi life con-found you, 



-3- 

and lone - ly your 
of bur - dens you 
and life seems all 



=^=F£— 6 — f -' lfr f> fa 




rr-r 



heart, your heart; 
bear, you bear; 
wrong, all wrong; 



=^=l=l=sS- 



There 
There 
There 



TO=CT=I= 



«_ 



r — i 



One 
One 
One 



l> 



to share your bur 

who wants to help 

who loves you dear 

-*- 

-ft 9 — _1r_ 

±=*= 



den, 
you, 

•ly, 



^m 



-\— ,-1 






to the 
com-fort 
on His 
-*- -*- 



I 1 1 — 



-g — £4" 



3t 



tMHh 



jour -neys end, the end, 
He will lend, will lend, 
word de - pend, de - pend, 




Lead you to a home in 
Give you strength to press the 
Live for Him and He will 



Chorus. 



fcfi 



ffi 



heaven, 
bat- tie, 
keep you 



jr f ir p P rs • „ p- 



'tis Je-sus, my Friend, my Friend.Come,and walk 

'tis Je-sus, my Friend, my Friend. 

this Je-sus, my Friend,my Friend. Walk with Him, 



with 



-A- | | -A- -A- -*- 



Copyrinbt. 1345. b; James D. Viushn 



■f — r 

, Music Publish 



• in "Honored Guest.' 



Walk with Jesus 



p d I ^ P u p 




§E=teiE^ 



this dear Friend, and He will lead you to the end, re 

this dear Friend, leadvouon to the end, 

-A- -A- -A- 





^===bjt=sb=±==== j= |£t 

A A ' A — hr — '-K- 



^^ 



F" 



rrr 



ly-ing on His Ho-ly word, and seek to win the 

On His word, Ho-ly word, win at last, 

-A- -A- -A- -A- 






3-^1 






~ -pi — ■ — ■- 



k p p 7" l, — p#— Fh — • — — F* — • — • — -1 — F# — H • ' 



p fr i — w p r, p ■ — -^ i) 

great re-ward; When you walk a -long with Him, He'll 

great re-ward; Walk each day, on with Him, 

-A- -A- -A- -A- A- -A- 

f- » p f f t- -p- f- ;E 

Egdzz==Eg=C=5 =g — ± EE iz= 5 — - nE F—r— 1^=— 



r- 



I 



rp— ~ - 



- 



I 



&EE 



; N^ 



=£ 



■R 



^— s- 



— 



: P" 



3=5: 



u £s- 

I 



lead you thru the shadows dim, 

thru the dark shadows dim, 



iv 



P P £ i/ 

un- til you reach 



that 

reach that bright 




Tr 



homea-bove, to rest for - ev 

home a- bo ve, thereto rest 



er in His love. 



in His love. 






S=p= 



g— p — ^? tfczfcrft: 



No. 118 



J. E. M. 



The Pentecostal Blessing 



J. E. Marsh 



t) -a- -0- -m- -»- -m- -<s>- -&- 



-0- -0- -<&■ 

1. Once Je - sus lived here with Hi9 peo - pie, 

2. The peo- pie were stand-ing to-geth - er, 

3. The Spir - it of God still is with us, 



Dai - ly taught them the 

When the Pen - te - cost 

Like He was on that 

-o- 



"A: 



-&- 



umM= 



V U 'I — I 






:£=to 



3t 



Sii 



#* 



things they should know, Told of heav-en a-bove, and the God that we 
Spir - it was shown, They were all in ac-cord, trust-ing Je - sus, their 
Pen - te- cost day, He is striv-ing with man, ev-'ry-where that He 



love, 
Lord, 
can, 




P-*i ■ — -?W si -I 1 * 

-ty a — aidEa — 1 — V^ — M 



Of a home to which some day we'll go (we shall go); He could not 
When He en-tered and claimed them Hi9 own (all His own); They heard in 
That be-liev-ers His will might o - bey (might o- bey); Oh, let us 



live 
their 
then 



^9- 



i 



£==£: 



-p. 
5z 



4= 



:t 



£ 



?z- 



*t_>. 



■T" 



M 



SS3 

S — ^i— ^* — # — * 



tei=i=3 






3EE£ 



3= 



$=£ 



bsi: 



3E3 



J -#- -* -* 

here with us al - ways, He as-cend-ed with light all a - round, But He 
tongues, ev-'ry Ian- guage, And with tongues like as fire they were crowned, Like an 
heed His en-treat-ies, Bid Him en - ter our Spir-its to crown, Ev-'ry 

k w ^ iv^t^ "•- ■#" "»- "•- -Pi -*- 1* 

j3J^=fctr±t==kdb=Eb==»=zfc 



-at -&■ 



-p-^« — i — r 



^^ gJE^g 






said, "if I go, I would have you to know, I will send the Com-fort-er down.' 
on - rnsh-ing wind, God the blessing did send, When the Ho-ly Spir-it came down, 
true Christian soul can be cleansed and made whole, When the Ho-ly Spir-it comes down. 



s^g: 



-0- -A- 



Copyright. 1945, by James 0. Vaughan, Music Publisher, in "Honored Guest." 



The Pentecostal Blessing 



Chorus 



$=£ 



£ 



-si— 



T 



&t 



3E3 



Je-sussaid, . . . "if I leave you, ... 1 will send you the 
Je-sus said while on earth, "if I leave you, thru love, 



, ff 



bh 



w 



t- 1- 



-•: 






• - -»- - »- -p- -g 



ppI — i — r 



w 



i 



£ 



^=i=fe 



■zT 



3=ff 



3BE 



S 



Com-fort-er down, . . . Heas-cend - ed to heav-en, . . 

down, send Him down, He as-cend-ed to heav - en, to heav-en a-bove, 

I J. J | .*..♦- 

ttJ? fffff ■ g -g- r f 



*: 



3 PIT 



far 



4= 



-eg — 



4 J i i . I 



$=^ 



-&>- 



F*fg=t 



* 



TT— ^— ■; 



r i 



izts 



And His glo - ry was shown all a - round; . , When Pe-ter stood tell-ing the 

all a-round; 

4* 



fcsy> 



^u^- 



t=t 



i=^ 



t 



&T=t 



$=£ 



:a: 



3=£ 



at 



ist 



* 



i 



peo - pie, What the old pro-phet Jo - el had said, Ma-ny 

I he had said, 

. ..^ +- -•- -•- -p- -p- -•- -•- -k T T b Q f ' T 



s 



I 1 



£=£ 



"p— p- 



$=* 



4U> 







r*=i= 



* 1 bI f* M 1 ! ■ ■ Si 1 1 1 



~2Xi"V~7'T 



m 



on Him believed, and the bless-ing received, When the Ho - ly Spir-it came down. 
-A- -A- „ _ -*- -A- _ 



y -a I 1 1 S-> I 1— 

»f. A Jk A ^ A A 



£=9= 



trtri — t"t 



I f T- ' j ^y 



No. 119. I'm Trusting In His Love 

W. B- Walbert 



Byron Faust 



fegj^Miffii^i 



:J=S= 



1. love di-vine so tender and com-pell-ing, Deeper than the mighty sea, 

2. Within the current of His love I'm hid-ing, Hap-py, sing-ing all the day, 

3. I'm trusting in His precious love to guide me,Till this pil - grim-age is o'er, 



~S££=;p = pzbE:=p = p = p = p=p=b[ == t == E*— »=g = »=g = p-b A 



*— fWT 



-A- -A- -A- -* 



-A- -j£s- 



UZJ J ^ j 



rjF~ g~ 



Love, all oth-er love ex -eel -ling, Giv-ing joy and vie -to -ry; It lights the 
And in Christ I am con-fid -ing, He is all my hope and stay; My heart for 
In His arms He'll safe-ly hide me, Till I reach the oth - er shore; matchless 

-A-=- _ m -A- -A- -t£s- 

-k--k — t — t — k r U- 



I 



ggEESSgEi^ 






& »• ■ » — « 



-— -— — r-tl 1 — b- fczz: z — g — ! *— rFr-» 



way to mansions op in glo - ry, In that land of joy a - bove, 

love so true is al - ways yearning, Christ will nev-er pass mo by, 

love , God's blessed who- so - ev - er, Reach-ing oat to ev • ry race, 

-*i - A . - A . .£_ _±. .+. . A . I . A . • . A . .p. _ 4 . 



:t_t_i: 






Home, sweet home of song and 
In my soul this love is 
Love Di- vine that changes- 

i r\ -a- -a- -a- 

^-i-* k - k _ k _ k _l 



i f~ —r~ — f — »* — fc— :z *»' — i — es« r^ «"" — * — * — — i 



Chorus. 



£s-> £ — S- L £sl — A- L ' A A— A- 4 A A — ' 



"23; 



sto-ry, Land of ev -er -last -kg love. Trnst-ing in His love yes, 

burning, It, a ■ lone can sat • is • fy. I'm trnst-ing in my Sav-ionr's love to 

nev-er, Gift of God's e - ter -nal grace. 

h 



P— fa- r t-_t_t_ «_*_ k ^ 1_* iL_«_jL?- * 

&p=E=fe^=p=p=r=r=E-Jg-g=p: F 



t-r 



*^E 



to hide me, to hide me, fori surely know 'tis trae, His love is troe, 
hide me, For I know His love is true, 

ft _n P. J) < J J 1 JJU'JJ 



Ezdf 



EEgEei 



Coorrieht. 1945, by James D. Vanehsn. Mueic PobHsher. In "Honored Gnest " 



I'm Trusting in His Love 

1 C l — 2 — J — J M — a — * — ■ 



Happy day I know that He '11 guide me, will guide me 
And some street day I kuovr that He will guide me 

1**t*1i — i J J j i j d J 

k^ x— * .*-r?5r-* ■ — * *fc— * « — — 



1 X 



teslf 






p- 



#=. 



.£2. £Z. 



^_-j^^^d= ^^^F^^ fcM^ 



: ^=B=i=?Ei : 



*— *- 



--% 



-«-* 






y 



=#&= 



To my home be ■ jond t 
To my home beyond the blue; 

_fo._fo _p J> « J h p p p h ^ 



p p 

, be- yond the blue;With ho -ly man - na 
Ho-lyman-na 




Hi r~ . T~l g * W~~' 1 l~* *~~* ~r». ~ ~*~P 

8 ^-p-P-p- r ^ " P fit 



from a-bore He feeds 
dai - ly He 



I 

me, As I walk close by His 

ime, He feeds me, As I walk close by His 



_ «_. — a fc — k — k ^ « — M — u_ r - — .1 — -i__| — i p 



=t= 






^Bzjt ==jb=zjzz5= =j= »=^czz: ij=k z=^z: 

9? t^s a — a — W — h — I h h * — h — 

J X - ^ P P P ^ ^ PP-j-pP 

side, And so it mat - ters not wher-e're He 

side, close by His side, So it mat-ters not where 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

-F — F — .i i ■ 1 k k k k k k — 



^^5=P=P=P=P 



l 



BE 



r- 



f^£-^=fz=^rt^^=J=?£^t2^^-tt^kZ^| 

1 t_£s ^p — P=-t» — f — fr 

leads me, I will trust His love to guide,His love to guide. 

He leads me, He leads me , 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- hhd Pl P h 



=^=t2=t2^3=p=t3=Ft=g=r 



N=t=h=F 



:p=t 






r-txl 



No. 120. 

Millard A. Glenn 



I'm a Pilgrim Down Here 



W. B. Walbert 



tettfci 



=t 



1 



it 



iiiiii 



-*- -0- -0- -0- -0- -*• 

b b b b i> u 

1. I'm a pil- grim down here in this wea-ri - some 

2- Tho' my troub-les are great, and the way may seem 

3. In the Light of God'slove, I will trav-el a - 

. — ± — A — A — A — ^ — ± — 



b g 5 b P 



^ 



S3= 



r^3 B 



15^^3=3? 



tSU-# ^ f # — # — # . 

spTTn 



1 & D H D C 

land, But I have a new home, 

long, I will nev -er give up, 

long, Give Him all of my praise, 

m ' p B pi B B , _ _ 



fife- 



"d — ±TZ" 



$— 



l> b b ^ ^ U b 



on a beau -ti - ful strand, on a beau-ti- ful strand; 'lis a home of de 

nev -er yield to the wrong, nev-er yield to thewrong;I am head- ed for 

in a won - der - ful song,in a won-der -ful song;Then some af -ter a 

P ft ft 



= b A P A *- r A— A A A A A * 






as 



:*feM 



1&i — * 



:$** 



d 



=r==b:ft 



i b T 1" T*" '3' ' * " iH^tt 

light, made of jew-els so rare 

home, and I mean to go thru, 

while, at the beau-ti - ful gate,. 



± * A A A A ■ 1 A A A — A — A — A- 






"is ' 5 b 5 5 £ l> p "^~p" 

By the Saviour'sownhands; and I mean to go 

By the won-der- ful grace of my Sav-iour bo 

I will en -ter that home, where my loved ones now 



1 — A A A A A A 1 1 1 1 1 



P=b=b=b=b=£ 

D.S. And I mean to go 



Copyright. 1945. by Jimei D. Vnuirh.n. MobIc Pnbliehe 



'Honored GDQBt.' 



&=r- 



m 



3 



I'm a Pilgrim Down Here 

r fa fa E) fa M > 



Fine Chorus. 



:^=4± ^-^-^ - 



d— *— d— m~ 



I'm a pilgrim down here 



v i) V x> $ .d P . 

there, and I mean to go there. 

true, of my Saviour so true, 

wait, where my loied ones now wait, I'm a pil-grim down here, 

ijjiiii! 8 i ft b b b h P 



HE 



thru, and I mean to go thru. 



&£=- 



ttz3: 



^b_ fr^_j »-J>-JV 

1£=S gZZ^ZZ4=3= 



in a troublesome world, 
in a troub -le -some world, Sa-tan'sfu - ri- ons 

1;' x i - ^ J j j J JLJL1 * 



mm. 



'WF^ 



*2- 



rS==j»Z~£== 



f — — — • — — • — u — 5 — 5 — - — 0— L — — « — - — = — = — 0— 



Sa-tan's fu - ri - ous darts all a-round me are hurled, all a-roond me are hurled; 
darts all a-round me are hnrled; 

fgteg «=z»_*_«_J=_c_|:t — — — — 1 



4rz£=3=fcfct±B: 



Rl ft 



^ T- " * j F^ -- r == =e=fr===j==j===fa-; 



1 . p p P u 

Yet I trav -el a - long, with my Sav-iour in 

Yet I trav - el a - long, 



Srt^ 



£bEr 



^ 



-A A A A A A 

:»==£==§==%==$=!*:==— 
P P p P 



0! 



£3E£Me^ 



Z3.-S'. 



-^ 



•A— A 



a »-rr-r-nrir 



b b b v P P i 

view, I am headed for home, 

with my Saviour in view, I amhead-ed for home, 

ft & & ft ^ ^ * -f- *r -9r> -*- -f= 



SI 



No. 121. 

Millard A. Glenn 



I'm Sailing Along 



Austin Williams 






-i- 



^ 



:# 



£=* 



^ 



■** 

1. A -cross the tur-bu -lent sea of life I'msail-ing a -long,Tho' an - gry 

2. My bless-ed Saviour is Captain on this ves-sel of love, And keeps it 

3. And when we an -chor at last witb-in the har-bor at home,He'll give a 

-A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

t- _f _-tr_t: 






=J==t5=I 



=45=toftz3=*=fc: 



— h— l— -N--h-J P-h-r --ft— ft— P-- P-P-M— q — q3 — M — 



bil-lows a-round me may roll, may roll; I mean to sail on with cour-age 
rid-ing tho' bil-lows roll high,roll high;And He will guide it to safe - ty 
hap-py,glad welcome to me, to me; And then I'll join heaven's throng. thru 

-A- -A- -A- -A- 

p=p=t;=pzEp=t:=p=p=p=z 



-» • 9 » •— H 




tr-tr-t— p- 






• 7 r t 

knowing 'twill not be long, Till I reach heaven, the home of the soul, the soul. 
in the har-bor a-bove,Somehap-py morning, up yonder on high, on high, 
out the a-ges to come, In prais-ing Je-sus, so hap-py and free, so free. 

-A- -A- -A- A -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- I 1 Pi 

Chorus. 




§ 



With Je-sus I'msail-ing the o-cean'sbil-low -y 
Sail-ing o-cean's 



n r ^ - g ~ L 



es 



foam, 
bil-low - y foam, 

p— e — b — F =±= 



^5=^= 



-♦ — \ 

to 



r: 



=fc 



« • 5 — # — zp — a 1^ — j: 

_ * — H-: — 1» — * — ♦ — ♦ — e — — — 
g-p-tp-^-p-^-A-^-A- 

head-ed for heav-en, up yon-der, nev-er to roam, With 

Heav-en, yon-der, nev-er to roam, 

* fJteLf 



•. — «. 



fg^^§=^=^ 



U -U-3— t 



Copyright. 1945. by Ja 



i D Vnmrhnn. 'Music Publisher in "Honored Gaest. 



-• •- 

"I— D" 



3— 



I'm Sailing Along 

Jl-4— =i h 









^=fr 



i 



F^ H — if-F^ — ► — ♦ — ► — -^h 

■ g "g & ' H-f=Fp 

all of the ran-somed,l'llsing in praise to Je-sus the King, 

Eansomed sing praise Je- sus the King, - ver in 



55- — — r g— * g 1 



— b 






*=i 



t^&EE 






In that home, sweet dad hap-py home; Joy to 

that e - ter - nal home, sweet home; It is a joy to have my 






=7- 




J_*_4_l_? £1 



-n- 



5=H=^=^=? 



teE^=E^^?-EEl= 



S3E*EJ=i 



• : ^- 



\ ~^\ M — z\ — S -fj- 



have Him watching o'er me, Hope, my life 

Saviour watching o'er me, He is my hope, my life and ev - er - 



4 1 



f^—- ; 1 — = 



*=£ 



-m . 



=3j« 



i=iz 



q= 






Pi 



w — i — 



trHi 



-s^ — * — 



-A J-^ . « L ' 1 h— I 



-tr- 

and He is my song, Might-y waves I'm sail - ing 

last -ing song, - ver the Might-y waves I'm sail - ing, 




' r i ) s • r- — r m 1 — ^» — t»K ■ r" 







on, sail -ing a -long, sail -ing a -long, 

sail -ing a -long, I'm sailing on, I'm sail- ing on. 



No. 122. 

Millard A. Glenn 

£d>zz: 



Such Wonderful Love 



Adger M. Pace 



3- 



BfeEfe3E£g 



it 



¥ 



-T- 



i 



u p y i> P 



1. Our Sav-iour once died on Cal - va - ry'a 

2. Up -on the old cross ....I see my Lord 

3. He suf -fered the pain the grief and the 



s 



fa 



&JZ3=B=5=t3=t5 



I 



?=3tZD 



^ — P— P =tJ=t^=:U 



d2 



4-'— ♦ ♦ ♦ — i-<3— 



BE 



=t 



11 



1-=*- _ 

-H- - — - -■- -■- -■- -=- M 

fj !J,p-f 1 

moun - tain, what a great shame, To let the whole world 
dy - ing, that we might life, For-sak-en by all, . 
eor - row, won-der -ful love, That we should by rights, 



1 L> b V [> P 



« ^ X 1 1 fc «- 



h- 



"5~b-p- 



i » — i 1 1 1 



-r 



=& 



^E^^^l^fe^ 



•■ - & ii b b t> IT i * 

go hap-py and free, go hap-py and free; And from His dear 

so lone-ly and blue, so lone- ly and blue; It seems that I 

have suffered in - stead, have suf-fered in - stead;He did it that 



C «— Bk r « ?- -a.hr k- 



te 



S=£ 




i===^=*=jM^~= 



3 A A A * •*" 

! C b 3 P P 



— Fir— 3— » 






side.'. . . T. . . r . was o-peneda foun - tain, bless His dear name, 

hear His moans and His cry - ing "Fa-therfor-give" 

we some hap-py to - mor - row, yon-dei a - bove, 






— »~ ~^ — » — 



— -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- 

::zz£rfi=±=EEfc 



=£=# 




-fV-r 



s 



It 



* 



1 f jft'^n 
i J b" tr~r> . * ? 

'Tis flow -ing to-day for you and for 

They know not at all, just what they now 

Be with Him at home, just as He has 

-■- -■- •■- -■- - 



'* 1 !— D — « c^ 



u 



Copyright. 1946. by Jimee D. Vomth.n. Music Publisher. In "Honored Gneet. 



Such Wonderful Love 

Chords. 



sEEEpf: 



S_g__S — A— fi—ns** 



=~: 



f T ? T * T 

me, fur yon and for me. Such won-der - ful lore, 
do, just what they now do. 
8aid,just as He has said. 

J) J) -h 



^•PZHA A— - 



§£__ 



1 



Such won-der -ful love, 

rv- 

# « e e 9 . 



«— tc 



^j>=&d- 



ffiE*EjQ 



££*£fe 



=t 



A - A A — * 1 



_L D P 5 [J - D~ ~^ s L *i 5 6 5 ST 

such marvelous grace, Thru Jesus was shown 

such marvelous grace , Thru Jesus was shown 






E== 



*;_£> 4l .^ - 



£E 



^rt-s= K=^ 



, — p — i — -p — i — -\ . — * — i— —i — i — i — i 



V — H « d ~ 3-4 -H — -W » — » — » »" 



P p b b p p 

in tak-ing our place; He gave His own life 

in taking our place, in tak-ing ourplace; HegaveHisown 

-i — » P w_ g_ F - .«_______« ^ — «—- *— f— 

-F — tr — l T H 1 — S£ — i— — P_ fr " |a~ |a is : 



^Rt-P^H- -w — r—Y* — » — r. — r. — r — »— :L - - — 



— b~-g— i Fr — r — s — u— r— r-— EEzEBbE= 



•r 






fe^ste 



for you and for me, Such won-der -ful 

life for you and for me, 

__ _ -f— -F- -F - - F - -g ~ 



I 



i=t 



B_g 



Lp =-£ 



-# • » n 



K — g — s- 



^faEEgEj 



B3 




-T-f-f-g p u -,- - r ,- , - F - F ^ , 

love, oh, how could it be? 

Such won-der-ful love oh , how could it be, oh, how coald it be? 

M__J ';■______ h 



£ •— i- -■- -■- -■- - q 

-S 1 - b— 5=^-=b=g=:--=S=:g 



:t=^ 



B=F= tc =F : Ff=r = 6= tt 



:t?z:l 



No. 123. The Keeping Of His Love 



Rev. Dr. Alfred Barratt 



£z 



t) -A- W S* 



4- 



2± 



^ 



J^ 



b b 



A. 0. Hargett 

ir rv 



t L-Jl— j±zz=tez3 



1. Whenthe path is lone 

2. In the night of sor 

3. We are in His keep 



ly, des - o - late and 
row, or in grief and 
ing, morn- ing, noon and 



CM: 



:# — i — e 

-k— K-JL 



"t* — t? — t?" 



^5 



* 



^3: 



*=* 






J P b b P 5 b k 

drear, And our friends oace faith 

pain , When our tears are fall 

night On our lone -ly path 

F-a— .-'x/'-i. 



ful 
ing 
way 







& & h r> fo 

■ ■-! — m ■ ■ ■ 



:=t= 



9 



c±- 



^5^ 



fcfci^E 



5 I b" ? f ? * 

seem to dis - a -pear; This sweet tho't brings cour 

au-tumnrain; Those who seek the Sav 

gold-en light, Je - sus keeps our cour 

-A- 

t: 



just like 
shines a 

-A- -A 

T=fc 




>=£* P « fik- k 



-3: 



~- 



> — 

P 



-k — k- 



k — k — 

b- £= 



b b b 

age, comfort, hopeand cheer, 

iour,nev-er seek in vain, 

age,shin-ingclearandbright We are 

-A- -A- m •*- A- -A- -A- -A- -A- -A- *1 

;^=t=:is=:t=*=qEEt 
b~ b~b — P~P — p— P 

b b b b b b 

We are in thekeep-ing of the Sav-ionr's love. 
in the keep - ing of the Sa?-iour's love, of the SaT-ionr's love. 

> J i I J * * ... __ i ft. r j» _r> h 




S_._ 1 



^ b p 



|t=^E^ 



Cotijrlffht. 1945, by Junes D. Vaoshan. Manic Publisher, in "Honored Gaest. 



=$ 



1 



The Keeping of His Love 



Chorus. 



We are in the keep 



Fr- • ■F g==g==g - 3EE *TT 



ing of the Saviour's love, 
We are in the keep- ing of the Saviour's love, of 
■♦- -♦- -♦- -♦- -*- . . _p_ J\ ^ 

—a— I #- 



£l_J=. 






)--N- 



S=f 



--N- -P 
_il aL 



& 



^=±=S£== 



* J* } $ 6 J fe E 



* 



r> 



-d — d — d — d — d 5 — *!-TtH H 



-«4t 



the Saviour's love.We are in the keep 

• a- j J' n _*\ X _ 



We are in the keeping of the Sav-ioar's 



==a=?zz^=:^ 



-y-~- 



6=tt=tj=s=E= 









ing of the Hav-ioor's 

h r> fi 

A- -A- - A- • *• -A- -A- -A- 



rr- 






-j^ — t) — h — h — b — t^ 

;« a a! a 1 a' a) ~ 



t 



love; He 

love, of His won-drous love; 



c_je * « ~ = m 



& & 



_ -zH — F— i- 



=4 



-h 1 — ^— hd 



-A V I ^~ — 

u 

ev - er watch - ing 

He is ev - er watching 

-i»- -»- -♦- -A- -©- -*- 

r tr— \=-z t— t— t-tz- 

ft » 



5 5 



t~~ D" 



from His throne a-bove, We are 

from His throne a- bove,from|His throne a -bove, We are in the keep - 

-A- A- m -A-_ -A- -A- -A- A- -A- -A- *\ 

^g=g=P=fcd £— V— P— 9— P= gz=i. 



S= 






3 



!=3l. 



=tpt 



in the keep - ing 
ing 



of 
of 



p p b P 



the Sav-iour's love. 

the Sav-iour's love, of the Sav-iour's love. 



i*=fcfc 



±=tz=f=fa 



S — r - gP JP b a J-i 



Coiiyrlebt. 1945. by James D. Vanghan, Music Publisher, in "Honored GaeBt. 



-nr 



No. 124. 

M.W.E. . 



When They Call My Name 

(OVER HEAVEN'S RADIO) Marion W. Easterling 



-♦- -•- -♦- -♦- ar ^ -*- ^ ^ -»i 



1. Far a-bove the din I'll be list'ning in some hap-py morning bright and fair, 

2. Voic-es sweet and low that I used to know will thrill my soul with rapture sweet, 

3. At the set of sun, when my race is run I'll fold my tent and fly a -way, 



§- — jt-* *~i -A — A r A A— r A * * — * — 1 A— rA=— ■ 



-$% 



v$ 






When they call my name, when they call my name o-ver Heav-en's ra-di-o; 



&£ 



a 



n 



f=3: 



t: 



-A 5 -- A- 



$r. 



«* 



U P 






-A- 



:t=t=:I= 



rr^wwr^ 



E^l] 



— bV-V^" 3~ #— •-^- c #— ^— h— •— C1 — S— 3— 3— *— ^-t^i- 3 



Joy will fill my soul, hal-le-lu -jahs roll, there'll be no stat-ic in the air, 
Bid-ding me come home, nev-er more to roam, where friends and loved ones I shall meet, 
To a land of bliss, bright-er far than this, 'tis one e - ter-nal hap -py day, 



m F— r A A A A i-A A r-A A A A f- — A— i-A^—m 

^^^bz=Bz:E£=kizl£=te==EEb— £— EfcEgzzHzzgzzg— b-h-El 



* 



BE 



«5: 






tz9E±= 



3=* 









-fc 



;s=3 



rV 



3 



>te 



tr-tr-^- *Vf=rf3 



1 



When thej call my name, when they call my name o-ver Heaven's ra-di-o. 



A -D-, 



ft J -♦- -♦- 



„ 1 n i. -,♦- n ft -♦- -♦- i ' 

H A A-— A ' «~rA A=— A A — A— rl 1 A «rri ' 1 - ' 1 



fcf 

Chorus. 



S* 



SH 



fr-fy-fr 



3E£ 






-*- 



3t 

1— r 



LT ^ D •*• 



1 



When they call my name,when I 



r* 



tit* 



3eS 



call my name o-ver Heaven's ra - di - o, 

Heav - en's ra-di-o, 

A A-^-A- 



k=~±zz?=\- 



:b=£rk= 



rv 



tp: 



is 



^ 



Copyright. 1945. by Junes D. Vang-han, Mnsic Publisher, in "Honored Guest. 




When They Call My Name 

I'li fly up high,fly a-way up high, Far a - bo ve the clouds I '11 go; 

Far a-bove the clouds I'll go; 
"* — **~ * 1~* — w^~& — * — a— | * i-g — ^ — «-;■ 



^ — 



_a — : lai: 



fe ^ 



==£==&=: 






Praise the Lord, 

°> 

Hal-le - Iu - jah, 

i .«,. .*. .*. .^i. «i 

r* .* * - 



^gS^EjEE ^EBEESi 



:fci=f 



hal-le -lu- jah, 

-A * A— 

ib= ~~ 



Mu - sic rich and rare sweet-ly ring-ing in the air, 



It will 






gg^ g jteE 



to=£ 



£fc£#* 



3 



rH 



-♦- -♦- -♦- 

be a hap-py time I know, Call my name, 

be a hap - py time I know,When they call my name,yes,when thej 

1 A rA 4 _ .S3 A A-=— A ' -*— -1 



■ft— 1> 






±=1 



Coda 



b=i=Hrir===FM=F^F 



fer-tr 

call my name -ver Heaven's ra-di-o. 



-r— r-^— # -^— ^ — 



:fc_^_^ r -fc-£L_£L 



f gggE — — — p — $—Y~ 



#=*=* 



tt=tn& 



4»L 



I'll be some-where 



=i= 



fczfc±tt=4t±: 



Jft b J JUf 



ffi33=itE5= 



list'ning, I'll be some-where 



Rit. 

■H 1 ! 1 H — M — 4—1— 1 1 — ! — 1 — d 1 — 1— h*— 



list'ning, I'll be some-where list'ning for my name. 
& ft & 



resi^^a^^M 



No. 125. Come Into My Heart Lord, Jesus 



A. M. P. 




Adger M, Pace 



£ 



£ 



• 3 m • 



.3 



1. Come in • to my heart, 

2. Come in - t© my heart, 

3. Come in - to my heart, 



fHH "f" 



Lord, Je - bus I 
and help me un- 
and make me Thine 



mtst 



a 



i^f 



■1 h • m #- 



=P=£ 



I± 



-fc 






fs 

3*= 



r 5 u p p r "i ** 

fjray, Lord, Je- sua I pray.Andmakeme a 

oad,andhelp me un- load, Where sin used to 

own,andmake me Thine own, The tern - pie of 



glad 

be 

God 



l> \> V U 



new 
take 
and 




creature to - day , new creature to - day ;Take ev -'ry -thingfalse, 
up Thinea-bode,takeupThinea -bode ;Lord,make me so pure 
sit on Thy throne,and sit on Thy throne;Keep world -li-ness out, 



fcC-E-Efe 



£*=&= 



I 1 1 9 ^r 



£=*=*=|C=£ 



:fczfc=fc-: 



£=# 



feii 






f- 1 X' y U P U I 

and cast it a - side, and cast it a - side, Lord make it a 

and ho - ly with -in, and ho- ly with -in, That oth-ers may 

and fill me with love, and fill me with love , Pre - pare me dear 



-1 — g- 



:-=£—£=*: 



"t? — tr 



rf=K=j=3 --. £ 







IPl 



-4 A— *- 



f— i— 



where Thou canst a - bide, where Thon canst a- bide- 
with Je- sus I've been,with Je-sus I've been. 
for heav-en a- bove, for heav-en a - bove. 



ztfctP^^F— ^==-^= 



t^-ff— s — • — • — « — » — *> — * — •- 



A 



CoD7rieht. 1946. by James D. Vauarbon, Music Publisher, in "Honored Guest." 



Come Into My Heart, Lord, Jesus 



i 



.Chords. 



I 



^ 



_& h h h— J- 

-\- — — - a a A — A A- 



3 — ^ 



Come in - to my heart, 

Come it - to my heart, come in - to my 

h h P h i 

j sf- x ± ± i * ^: -| X' 



^3-* 



*=£ 



■V— 



P^ 



r> 



— a_ 



0^ K K 


S S | 


— r.-h — h — h — h 1 J5 


ll/s— ^ — d — ^h 


1' «f j =i ^ --s-ffl 3 3 3 J J. 




come in • 
heart, 

f * 


to my heart, And make it Thy throne, 

And make it Thy throne, and 

fk f».*i « h h P P 1 

« J « i x* s * -»■ -■- -*■ ■*■ 


H&-§= 


■■- m p 


tr t D" 


^=£- ." 


-' -wJ- L) U p U 





:£=£ 






JUL-U-JL^ 



*t 



£ 



F=fc= 



» f r t p 

and nev- er de-part;Oh.makeme so pure, 
nev-er de-part; Oh, make me so 



^^Lg^J-PPP^ 



t2=S=^r~^=== 



5=tfc 



^f : 



i — gP 



^ A A A A— 






IM 



s 



r-t 



±r 



V 



"* vi 



fc=sl 






*=$=* 



pure, 



1 X' ^p 

and per -feet in love, 



-« ■ a 1 — 

L> U P ' 



and per -feet in iove, 



That I may be 



B 



>i 1*- 



fcfc 



■f— 1> 



t= £=s=E=a= g 



ffi) A A A A A A a. A ~ — \-£^- M 

th-\ ■— p— \r~ T~ p— r— *— *— »— »~ p— ^— 5— r-s — ? 

fit for heav-en a- bove. 

That I may be fit for heav-en a • bove. 

f r r r J=M^=d 



m 



\ T ,1 F= E: 
-• — • — 9 — • 



=5=P=P : 



#- 



No. 126. 

Rev. Rupert Cravens 



Down Memory Lane 



H. H. McDonald 



I 



iEBEfesi 



^z OU^l-fr 



fe3CPT^J^^= 



* 



r^- ^ 



utz*: 



-*- -^ -*- •*- 



1. So of-ten in fond-est dreams I stroll and vis-ion sweet scenes that stir my soul, 

2. I know I shall meet them by and by with^ Je - bus a-round the throne on high, 

3. These voic-es of old are call-ingme to join them a-gain be-yond the sea, 



it H* & 14 4— L 4 A 4 14 14 ± 14 A 



H4 14 14 4— L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4- 



*^=«zzr=fc 



■a- 



i^B^B 






■^ 



It seems I am with my friend* a-gain and sing-ing with them in sweet re-irain; 
Where never a sad good-by is said, where nev -er a lone-ly tear is shed; 
Where Je-sus the Sav-iour is the light and driv-eth a -way all shades of night; 
*-.+ +.+.. . * * -*- -J-_-g:_%_V-£= 

»- 

BE 



=lHMq££££=t^1Mt 



s^fflFr^r . ;=b=p=^ 4p-P=g= & 



»^=U=" 



ns 



te^=±rft 






£==£==ffc=£=£: 



P 



3--? 



■4 1 — «-#■-— « — H 1 1 j — H — 



-V -*■ -j- V 



Buthere I shall sing with them no more, they left me to live on heaven's shore, 

So I will be f aith-ful ev-'ry day and walk with my Sav-iour all the way, 

Ere long I shall fly a -way to rest, to sing with them in those mansions blest, 







P= 



:t 



:&.- tC 



=P=fe 



:tP= 



— i ' 1 — — — i 1 — m- 






Fine. Chorus. 



^ 



So thru the long years I'll wan-der on down mem-o-ry lane. 
For heav-en will be my dreams come trae of mem-o-ry lane. 
And rev -el in joys far bet- ter than my mem-o-ry lane. 

*--•--*- 121 






■*— S- 



5 tt -b— S— * — t— -h — h — H»-8» 



^: 



*=* 



=t= 



■#■—*- 



P=taf 



% 






Down mem- o -ry 

Via s 



j£3-M 



D. £.Than stroll-ing a - lone 



* 



in fond-est dreamt down mem-o-ry lane. 



-=!—«- 



i 






- i— X- 



S 



lane, 



Downmem'ry lane, 



I stroll a -long, 



just stroll-ing a-long, 



And vis - ion the 



as 



S*=*=3t=d===:=c 



5=t 



Jg-g — g 



Coprrinht. 1D46 b? Jamoo D. V«og-h»n. Mail* Pnbliaher. !■ " Honored Gn.it, 



(■ P — 



p=r=n=s=n= 






Down Memory Lane 



g=^-= = fc==fc=i^c^-^fc£ 



■fr. h h E>- 



:3=* 



pzz p zzzzrzr 



.1- 1.-1 J: 



3: 



..J i i — i — x_ 



Ma - ny scenes, the 
ma-ny hap-py scenes of long a-go, 



I — 9 — g — 9 

of long a-go, 



I hear th« sweet strains 



I hear the strains 



m 



pip-ipip^pppp^ix ^ r>h d.^ 



^^g^^ B=^ ^^fe 



r-=r-S- 






■™> 



-H I- 

ar 



=6 



45 -h. 



-Ez& 



:^_. 



of hap-py song Voic - es of the 

of beau-ti-ful song As sung by the voic-es of the ones I used to 

_1_S_ - i-.j J jJ-1 S J_JL J. .1 J i J ** 



-0—ft — *— P-I-P^ 



^zzfcfcz^zztzEB 



-R— •— ,- 



rf=ES=E!EESESE 



:&=$ 



^-fr- 



"*-• — # — — # — 0— 



-J— —41- 



CMP 



.=, — t^b— 1> 



-j£t- 



gjfefe^g 



PT 



ones I used to know; I'm waiting the dawn when I shall go 

know; The glo-ry dawn 

p p p J* .„* _ '. p 

Eg g — « — ■ * -- 

9tt-*a a 3 >* I 



:ts 



* 



e=fc^: 



5j=£=3i 



6E&E3E 



3: 



3S-S] — h„ h. h N 
Ztt — E — • %M H^— IP 



JM=qj_J-q-g=z=::^z^z; 



JU-^-q- P -i P q-^ufuft--ft--f>- 



home, To rev-el in pleasures rich and sweet,with them a-gain, 

I shall go home, Pleas - ures rich and sweet, with them a-gain, 






fa=~=i : 



WU- 



=Jb3=£ 



r: 



rH=r^ E 



w U t) J L> 

Much sweeter 'twill be 'neath heaven's fair dome , 

Much sweeter be 'neath heat-en's dome, 



i 2 !— 5- 



t~ r 1- 



.0- JL 



:rt£=fc=^=£=zhzS=- 



tr-tr-tr-tr 



iszzfszzkzzpz 
:t2=pz=5=zpz 



No. 127. 

Charles H. Huff 






I Am Glory Bound 



-I- 



M. D. McWhorter 



i 



§e 



* 



r$ 



1. There is glad-ness in my soul, since my Sav-iour made me wbolei 

2. Oh, the joy of go - ing on in the way the saints have gone* 

3. When I reach that hap - py place, saved by His re - deem • ing grace, 



s s m as 1 




;« Q ;J. ^ ^ -Ht <S> C ^ ^— ^ 5 *■#*— ^— ^- J 



Now I'm un - der His con-trol, Walking in the shin-ingway;jj 
To that bright e - ter - nal dawn, o - ver in the glo-ryland; 
I shall look up -on His face, praise Him for the erown I've won; 






e 






if 



-&>- 



^0 



Light of love is all a - round, great-est joy in Him IVefound 

'Tis a priv - i - lege to know as I trav - el here be - low' 

When I'm there a mil - lion years, free from sor - row, pain and tears' 

■ — ■*" — r "*~ — ~i _ - " A ~ — r'l~ " — r~ 



nz E= — — E{::=[z=zp==t:— Ejtzzlg— ft- J 



m 



SS=i=3 







^ Chorus 






And with Him I'm glo- ry bound, there to live some hap-py day. 

With my Saviour I can go 5 there to join that hap-py band. Oh, yes I'm 

This sweet tho't my soul now cheers, heaven will have just be - gun. - 

1 £ 



-1T-J- 






!= fwfT 



* 
^ 



===F=! 5 




• — •- 



tJ=3: 



g§ 



Glo-ry bound, all around, footsteps o'er life's 

glo -ry bound, with love-light all around,to guide my footsteps o'erjlife's rugged 



SeeeS 1 



*i_ x 






tcBt 



^b— 



p=£ 



Copyright, 1540 by J.rr.ea D. V»ogh»D. Music Publisher. Id " Honor. d Gout. ' 



I Am Glory Bound 



tJ 






-s- 



:3— 3: 



r ^L 



iffi: 



\zm 



dark rug-ged way, I have found, heart rebound, 

way, New glo - ry I have fouud, that makes my heart rebound 

1>* p dt p «j s pp ■£. 






-=i — s- 






:J: 



g 



-J> 






fefeElEEE: 



-» — 



keeps me glad from day un - to day; 
with joy that keeps me glad from day to day; And as I 

_1 

dp 



in 

-9- 



isi=i^y=y=^ife 






Hi^ 



ffij 



S— Efc±=± 



:E? 



: *-rf^--^— I-hM— ! 



-fc— J— 4- 

si ad J— 



_£ 



te 



1/ ^ V 9 V 

on -ward go, 'tis sweet for me to know that Christ is walking cbse-ly 

On-wardgo, me to know., walking close, 

-#- ■&■ -»- -e- -0- -0- -a- -s>- -#- 

•i— -i— -i— -i — -t— -f— -(-- ■ 

k & A ■ r tt & * ri& 



^— : 



bP= 






j-laS EX— — OK 






V-p- r P 



4> I b-£ 

^ — -^ — ^ — ^ — g — ^ \~*i 

~ al m B~fcaZZC^: 



■^ 



-*■ 



P P "P 



— ^ p P "p 
by my side, And He will lead me on to heav-en's 

yes, close by my side, Lead me on, 



%f&= 



-I * A *- 

-I 1 1— 



-P p- 



s: 



^ ffig z 1 hfc — f— fe — * — =1 — g bf — g 



i» |& »j_ 



jzj>n£=3J=;i=5f 



PE=J: 



* 






_| _fc_j — ji_4 

j b i — g 



1-c 



A- 



P P "P ! P P ^ 

glo-ry dawn, where with Him some sweet day, I shall a - bide, 
glo-ry dawn, some sweet day, there I shall a -bide. 

■o- -«- 



ig?J=EiN 



jb n p- 



-H 1 j 1 

:Efcz=|5z=|E=|zszf 
V i 1/ i 



No. 128. 

Gwendol L. Pace 



Visions of Heaven 



AdgerM. Pace 




3=t 



=ft 



•-»; ;»" V 









1. Oit'times I live in a val-Iey, 

2. I then see flow -era a-roundme, 

3. The sun now shines in this val-ley, 

-A- -±- A- » 



far out from life's sunshine so 
where once there was noth-ing but 
with bril-liance so wondrously 






bright, 
gloom, 
bright, 



Where shadows gath -er a -round me, 
Whereon - ly thorns once were grow-ing, 
'Tis there I .walk with my Sav-iour, 




seems that I'm 
now find the 
fields of the 







F% 



♦ — d — H 1 — : — r* — * — - — f — tf — r*i < ! 1 — I 



lost from the light; 
ros -es in bloom; 
pur - est de - light; 



And in this val-ley I'm lone - ly, 
The birdsnow sing with such rap-ture, 
Some day my soul will go high - er, 
-*- i» — 



so 

their 

to 



.« -fc 



g=g=E=bgr-gz=b— Ebzzzbzzfczb— b= Eb^bEEES 




-*— fc 



— i- 1 M— y — F«-— « — ■!— F-* — — IF — • ^-d-r-*" — i — i— i 

-a — *— .*— .2— C *^d — 5— C J— [jjp-*— fl— -5- C2 — a—*- 3 

so gloom-y the day, That's when I go to my Saviour, 
so fills me with love, I feel I've gone on to heaven, 

of beau-ty sub-lime, And then I'll live with Him ev-er, 



t 



* k _-jPl r tl^-> fL. r -|T \ fc— fc . ff 



— t-f--+-- — i 1 F" ^ — » — • — *-'Tr 

— K- L - »-— » — » — L h — ft — h — ft - **- 

Chorus. 



1=3 



fcfi==K=i 










and ask Him to show me the way. 
and sing with the an -gels a - bove. 
a - bid - ing in bliss all the time. 



He brought 

Brought to me 



m 



t ^. — ^ — ^ — p — ^ rjF^ — $ — t — \m — $ — $ — "' ' 

>— #— #— s— #— •- = fV := h = F^Fh := b — P ■ ""* - 



Qoppriffht, 1946, br Junes D. Vuiffhan, Music Publisher, in "Honored Guest." 



Visions of Heaven 




t [> v r v k l> 

vis -ions of heav-en, way up in the land of the sky, And 

vis -ions way np in the sky, 

-P- x r k- 



§feS=£=3=g5 



P==U 






: t— 3—3- 



B=fe£=a 



U=|:=:±zn 



(K 



ej 



when 

When my Lord 



♦ h * a #30- ♦ •— 1 



D n v \> l, ^ ■» p 

He showed me my man-sion, so won-drous-ly hap-py was 
showed me won - drous - ly 



,^^E ^EE^j ^g|j 



I 



gi* j-— i— -3— - 



a 



I; 



i N 

3d — z! — si- 



r-f 



a — a — n i ; — r— ra n — 5 ~. 1 

# ^ m —m — — : it=iz=^z d 



hap-py was I; 



I saw 

Saw the stream's 



3 f 

the beau - ti - ful riv - er that 
beau -ty, 



pB=|fc=fc 






-3— ft* — jj — *i x -— ^ 




-■- p U [; p p 

flows thru the Cit - y of gold, The face 

and the streets of gold, Face of Christ, 

,if - - * -* 



Be 



.2|_2|_ 






=jjJEJli =|l| 



S 



-3—1: 






"Hf 



C T P" 



£=£ 



Je-sus, my Sav-iour whose beauty can nev-er be told. 

Je-sus, beau - ty can nev-er be told. 



iHE&Eg 



± 



B 



f = rfz=?z= :"= :f=t 



iJ=# 



pr^fe^^j) 



No. 129. 

Fay Wallington 



I Am Traveling On 



H. R. Sharpe 



. iJ=^=q==r»— * ■-+ _ T- > * » H B B-l 



" s ' \ $J%. fT% 



1. I am trav-el-ing on 

2. As I jour-ney a -long 

3. Tho' the world with its sin 



to the Cit - y of 

thru this troub-les - some 

looks up - on me and 



^= ^Mg 



^ 1 1 1 1 1» 1* fc. k k — I 

m 



i=m=5=e3 



nnr^r^ — mirrrr~ 

gold, to the Cit- y of gold,In a beau-ti-fulland, where they 

world,thrn this troub-les-somo world,! will f ol-low my Lord, keep His 

frown,lo«ksnp-on me and frown,I'll keep look-ing a- head, to my 

^H^-R-S-B-g-tL-j T^ g zzz p= gz^_|zz0=p_^ =0_^- 



trr? 



K-\- 



-P— *- 

-p-tr 






£- 



£=£ 



EZpC 



ttag* 



: -H- 



D $ $ $ $ d [> 1 



"5 01^C 



nev-er grow old, where they nev-er grow old; Tho'the way may seem dark 

banner un-furled,keep His ban-ner nn-fnr!ed;0- ver mountain and hill, 

hea?-en-ly crown, to my hea?-en-ly crown;It is wait-ing for me, 

.n A $ 



•B-r— K— ft— »- r A— A— A— ft— A— a_a 



^Eferfzitf 



vp A A- — W — K — 1 



=t 



_— M 



-» — « — ■— •— p— •- 
-i — i — i 1 — P- 

-kfc— lis — *-*—*—*- 



£ 



& 



£=} 



- a r 



and the jour-ney seem !ong,and the jour-ney seem long, I will nev - er give 
o - ver val- ley and plain, o - verval- ley and plain, I'llkeeptrudg-ing a ■ 
at the end of the way, at the end of the way, In that beau -ti - ful 

__> — A — a — A^-A- r A — A a — A — A — * — A — — - 



i=d: 



L D— ^— b— ^— ^— tP— P 



jj ju 1 1 ~—\-£i *h"| 

-B S3 H H 1 1 a -m H— r r J 



up 

long 

home 



,u_. 



SEEi=iEB3 



^ 



till I join the glad throng,till 1 join the glad throng 
till sweet heaven I gain, till sweet heav-en I gain. 
1 shallwearit someday, I shall wear it some day. 

^A_A_^_A^ c ^_Jf^M-JU, 



|~; 



^ 



Cogyripht. 1945. by James D, Vaaghan. Music Publisher, fa "Honored Guest.' 



I Am Traveling On 



Chorus. 


=T~ 


s h 


H-^- 


t^: 


-h- 


Bfat' — a a — a a — a — 

§— =1 s 


-« ■— 

L2 H-r 


— ■ — ■ — ■ — a m — S — a ■ — 

V P b 


-S- 


— ■ — 
— ^ — i 


I am trav - el - ing on 

I 


to the Cit 
am trav-el - ing on 


-y 


of 




-(*- -1*- -I*- -l*- -l*- -*- -l*- +- 

-« m 6~^ m m m H~ 


-k- 


A— | 


£%M * 


:3=t 


ihH-fioMfc=fc 


zkj- 


=P=3 



si 






r* rn r* f 



^nrtirrtr^ 



gold, Where the beauties of life shall f or- 

totheCit-y of gold, Where the beauties of life 

;. . A A *— g — *— f— A r - a*L A a a aCL A_ A_ A 

sLi W I . E !z_0 B n t I ~~ — M — c ~!I p P P— P— p 



^ t> Ia ' — - 



J=p= 



^_uj^r 



7 






F=1- 



p v T% H> p i x 



— n — p^-"- 



* 



Vtf-*-* 



5 b"^ 5 ^ !T 



ev-er un-fold; 'Tis a won-der-ful tho't, 

shallfpr-ev -er un-fold; 'Tis a wonderful tho't 

K — ^-nrp^ ^rrrrpr 



§==£:=z£==rf:pj: 






P A 6 R 



~^ ^ — ^~ 



-fc- 



$ 



=* 



-h — a — e — a a — S3 — _ — __ 

as I trav-el a - long, When I get to that 



1 









as I trav-el a - long, 

A- 

p: 



&ti 



Ji 



'*=&=&= 



JU&- 



__ _ _ p fg g ag 

ien I 



— a a — a — SB- 



T=£ 



home, I will sing a new song. 

When I get to that home, I will sing a new song, 

A k J & ft | B J> '> 

: ±: A A A . f!; A ^A 



- .. . . ,_A_^tL^_-^t_±r_tr^- 
Vg£ rl ^ g ft -_g_ Jl_- p H I § | pz 



r 



No. 130. Build on Jesus, the Rock 



D. T. C. 



Durwood T, Collins 



aroq q a 



=t — i 1 1 L 

-♦--♦--♦- 

1. Why build your house 

2. Sin's rag-ing winds 

3. The way of life 






.-!- 



3* 



:=$ 



3=2 



:=J5= 



43: 



onsink-ingsand? 
may toss your bark, 
is sweet and straight, 



IK - 

It does not 
As thru this 
A nar -row 




pay 
world 
path, 



-0i- - 
nor gain a crown; 
you on- ward plod; 
a bloodbought road; 



Build on the 
Lore's guid - ing 
'Twill take you 



WIsl^s 



M-% 



^=*=M=± 



i) \> 



M- 



$=m 



■£-. 



Rock 
light 
thru 



as God has planned, 
will change the dark, 
the pearl- y gate, 



£=3= 



Lest winds may 
Make bright the 
To streets of 



%q 



*=£: 



-g — g- 



¥ 






Chorus. 



» 



p p p 



blow 
way 
gold, 



and cast it down. 

thatleads to God. 

God'sblesta -bode. 



V P 

Christ Je-sus , the Rock, 






HI 



:|EEi= 



~j: 






Might-y Rock, 

-r-A * 

Szfc 



F 



-T=s 



IT >" * 

the Lord of 



t<5> # ■ ■ — t 

s — *\> p s p r^ 



i 



:£: 



-=l— S 



all, 
Lord «pf 



all, 



He sees and He hears 
Sees 



BE 



=±= 1: FJK fe fe 



Copyright. 1945. by Jam*i D. Vaag-hu. Music Pabllafaer. In 



the spar-row' 8 
and hears 

.-£ 






' Donor ed GoMt.' 



Build on Jesus, the Rock 



ti 



-rro- 



fall, the winds and the waves o - bey His will, 

sparrow's fall, Winds and waves do His will, 



^-F=F= r £ =3=g 



mfczk 



1 



tz5=3: 



:g^: 



:tz=rz=p: 



-3— g- 



r- 1 



£= 



PttZA 



If 



« f.Jiy.l 



-c 



— -•-(©- 

F I v 
be still;" 



When-ev -'er He speaks His' r . 

When He speaks His "peace be still;"He gave His own 



W 5 ^ 



jL_l 



r- 
te __j — i — p 



m — ■ 1 E- 

1 1 \— 



:fc=fcE=*=£EE 



:t=b=*^^=^ 



:J=t=£^==iJ-^J i - 



— 1 ^ g P-l- 



-• • & 

Gave His life on the tree, All who trust, 

life up - on the tree, That all who will trust 

J, J .M x A^J I s J J £ 



— A- 



-A A — 

-I— 4— b- 



5a: 



-P> < 



W~ 1 £ 






~F * i g *| g ~ i 



P P B p '^ 

might be free, Oh, broth-er, to-day, just deed Him your 

Himmight be free, Oh, to- day, 

1 * .1 .1 .f * 

r* A A 1 



S^SS 







jj$=i 



BE 



i — p - 









F=* 



^^f^ito^ 









3=3=3t= tf=3-zaq=3=: 



=& 



—•I—" — J — P-J M-M-- ■ 

— ■— Fzd~ a 1 



soul, AndHe will from yonr wea-ry heart, each bur-den roll, 

deed your soul, 



7^ F F F r A A A A A £ * m r -l 1 P- 



No. 1ST. 

A.M.F. 



I Dare Not Walk Alone 



Adger M. Pace 




1. I dare not try . 

2. I dare not climb 

3. With Christ to lead, 

4. When ends the road . 



to walk a - lone, , 

the mountain steep, 
. I fear no harm, 
for me be -low, . 



g& 



£=4- 



S: 



-p— p— r 



•* — * — » 

t=te 



T^ 






i 



^^^ 



:=): 



P 



=tt 



* 



Where sin is rife and peaceun-known; 

Nor span the o cean wide and deep; . 

While lean-ing on His might-y arm; . 

And 1 have passed the sun- set's glow; , 



§43 



^=^=k=^: 



b=tn=fc 



H 



-A !*— 



r^r^Hr 



\ 



ppf^i 



ssssss ss ssr^ P S — *l * • "" 



: -'k 



^ 



^3E^3 



But there is one who walks with me, . . 

With-out my Christ to lead me on, 

The stormsmay come the winds may blow, . , 

I'll cross with Him the wa - ters wide, . , 



!g^=g==^EE=^H 



rf=r=F 





l v y o & 

And dai • ly gives me vie • to - ry, sweet vie - to ■ ry. 

I dare not try to walk a - lone, to walk a - lone. 

But I am safe with Him I know,with Him I know. 

And rest with Him on yon-der side, on yon-der side. 



B> 1 ■ i 



> jk f--A- 



i E C . B B B B =£; 



JUULJi 



li 



Copyright. 1945, by J»mea D. Vnshan. Maelc Publisher, In "Blissful Showers. 



=5 



I Dare Not Walk Alone 



Chorus. 



fc h p p 



£ = £ =£=£ 



il 



r i & r^c" 



I dare not try 
I dare not try 



to walk a - lone, 
to walk, to walk a - lone, 

I dare not try to walk a - lone, 



m 



1 s 



i J> J! -I J J 



v=v- 



v= 



I 11 



I 



*=tc 



: S=S 



I 



I dare not try to walk a -lone, I dare not try to walk a -lone, 



m 



fcM=£ 



4-= 



* U UUE 



P 



^: 



3tZJ 



r 



r 



: n 



F=iF=F 



And have no one to call my 

And have no one to call my 

And have no one to call my own, no 



I? > b 



own; 

own, to call my own; 

one 






r[S=g=4^=f 



£=* 



m 



And have no one, no 



one to call my own; 




-t=t=dE=± 



t^EEE 



^r- 



4= 



=£ 



£ 



-^ 



=t 



-i — ■ — ■- 



With-out my Lord to lead me 

With-out my bless • ed Lord to lead me 

With-out my bless -ed Lord to 



V 



£_feijMt4 J_ -f_t-t-t-£- 



g ^_ z^=:U=p= p— ir~ I 



on, 

gent • ly on, 

lead me gent-ly on, 

p. JL. jfL. JL ■*- 



With-out my bless -ed Lord 



to lead me gent-ly on, 



££SBEE 



£ 



i 



=t 



^= 



ep>= 






I dare not try 
I dare not try 
I dare not try 

h e h J. 

A .-A- 



J 



to walk a 

to walk, to walk a 

to walk, to walk a 



J*3 



lone. 

■ lone, to walk a - lone. 

■ lone, 



*=k 



^ 



#=fc 



:£=£ 



R- 



dare not try to walk, to walk a 



lone. 



nr 



No. 132. 

J. E. M. 



Walking in the Highway 



J. E. Marsh 






1. 'Tis so sweet to know, 

2. He will stay with me, 
3. 1 am nev - er sad, 



as I on -ward go, 
give me vie - to - ry, 
but I'm al - ways 



£* 



^=>=;y^=r-r-r-:4^ 



4 -p=p— g — | — P=q=s- 



:b=t — L— U 






3 



=&: 



*— H 



Walk-ing in the high -way of the King di - vine, hal • le - lu - jab; 

"B8 



£=p=p= 



tr 



-»— r 

M 



~f^- 



b_j_ 3— i =j 



^ 



IS 



3=±±zJrJE^SE 



Je - sus is my Guide, 
Lean-ing on His arm, 
Un - der His con -trol, 



Slfe^^jlfpP 



in Him I a - bide' 
I will fear no harm, 
I shall reach my goal, 



.#- ... _ # _ ... _ # . r>^ h J-* j^ k 

-» f h r * H 1 1 1 fc ' — *~ 



. rr - p- p. 1—, — 

P— 4- — t=E=^ 

— p — p — p— 



rr; — * r h ~ * 



1 



Fine. 



^T< 



m 



0- -m- 

Walk-ing in the high-way of the King di-vine, hal - le 

.0- -0. .0. _■- .0. h ft ft 



lu - jah. 



-■ -■ ■ U K- 



Chorus. 









1 > 

i 






■f=5= 



-j- 

-B- 



^ 



Walk ing 

I am walk-ing, 

1 i 



'— F- 



l=f 



ev - er walk-ing, 

b". r- h "h 



la 



in the high • way 



&=£=* 






Copyright. 1945. by James D. Vaa«hao.'MuBlc Publisher in "Honored Gaest.' 



Walking in the Highway 



3 =- J-4 ft A A 9 A A A A- 

U i 3 P 



gi a- — ■ — =£ft- — A A A 3j A A A A^2~ 

•f- fj £ [J -f P P P P ^ P P P 

grand, Lead. - ing to the 

hap - py highway, Lead -ing me to, safe - ly up to the 

h b bj^ P> jC jC M. A 1 A. A jL *. 

^— V J?—*?— j <l— n = ■ K- 



=p= 



=£ 



r 



r 



ft: 



fa: 



*b±=l 



S 



13 



::£ 



£ 



PS 



v v b y P \> \> 

bless -ed promised land, o - ver yon- der, Walk -ing in the high ■ way 



r> 6 R 



— P — tr 



.k — ^ 



— p— jr 
! 4 &- 






-4L__fa __ 
-h — ■ — 9 — y~ — ■ — a 



£— * 



of the King di-vine,hal- le - lu - jah; I (am so glad,) am so 
s=J='?=fJ:z^z=': — ! ~ — :fl — — — - 



*=P 



— y- 






£— J— 5— ^— tr " 



: i=£ 



fc- 






f-£— %— %— b— * 

glad I'm so glad that Je - bus sought and found me, 

I am so glad, 



P fc, fo h , 

- m- ■& -0- - 0- *\ 

51 ±- ■ * A- 



-A- 

:tr_ 



y=& 



-A 



:P=P: 



-y- 



D.S. 



Ill 



:ftz 



=fc 



&£ 



i 



j h—ri 

■ p -#- -#- -•- p -•- 

P l> y b L> b 

Placed me on the bless-ed glo-ry line, 

Placed me up - on, safe - ly up ■ on with my Saviour- 

hj^ 4 s ft 



_,_4^ 



£=£ 



V — K~ r # — I * — h — * — • — ♦ — - — ♦-n 



^P=F^-D- 



No. 133. 

B.F. 



Help Me Lord, to Stand 



Byron Faust 






1. Help me oh, Lord, to do Thy will, hum-: bly now I pray, Help me, to 

2. Help me when I am prone to stray from Thy bless -ed fold, Help me to 

3. Help me to walkthe nar-row road, Lord, I hum -bly pray, Help me to 

-+■ -^- A - ■ W- - - -^- -**■ -^ -A- *- 

-A * 14 14 14 A 14 — hh h H 1 A A — HA A- 






1=£ 



*==£: 



gE^z=j= 3 



* 



t5==$5 



-feSE^^fe 



:*=&=$: 



IS 



Thee, my serv-ice give, all a -long my way; That I, oh, Lord, may 

walk in Thine own way, to the gates of gold; And when I'm bur-dened 

bear some oth-ers load, struggling in the way;Helpme to build up - 

_A_ A. -A- -A- . -A- -A- -A- _ 



— i 1 — hi— 

A 1* 14 14 dk ^4- 

^p — ^__4, — p (zzztp: 



-I 1 MP- 

-* L 1 



?— 4 4 41 — lA 4- 



3U 
5 



^~ 



=£ 






i — hi — i — i 1 

14 — H4 14 4 4 



JM>- 



^E§ 



live for Thee, do Thy blest command, When try -ing momentscometo me, 
down with care, hold me by Thy hand, And when my load is hard to bear, 
on the Rock, not up - on the sand, And when shall come the tempest shock, 
■ b» - - - A- A - A - A - A - - „ A -*- -A. 

S^=p=Mt^^^=gEt^«=Ee=gE£ 




A I ^ i) A A 

help me Lord to stand. Helpme, oh, Lord, to stand each 

Help me, oh, Lord, to stand each 

-a- n h h h r> 



• — m — — — e— r — i # — • • — 1 -4 — <. — <d — 



IjgEEEfe^SEEFEEE^E^p^ ESEBE a 



r 



r b \ 

shock, That comes a -long my way; 

tem - pest shock , That comes a - long my way , a - long my way ; 

s _ . -A- -»- -•- -A- -A- -(*=• 

^iEElElEEiE^Ef^EEES^EESEEtEtEEEg 

Copyright 1945, by Jamca D. Vauerhan, Music Publisher, In "Blissful Showers." 



Help Me Lord, to Stand 



T- 



f- 



:p=li2F 



*— c=P-kJ--«l— : 



i\j* 



5^S=tff=3* 



Help me to stand up - on the rock, 

Help me to stand up - on the sol - id Rock, 



m* 



g=e 



— Br — g — g — i — k — 5z:H — | — | — ' — E — * — *~i 



«• 



b l> 



± — I- — fan — — W- 



=fc 



U 






b=fc 



b ' 

And live for Thee each day. Be Thou 

And live for Thee each day, for Thee each day. Be Thou my 

N N N l*\ I 



— t*-p t? n u h y 



as 



mmm 



f&=*=«e 



-fv- 



J— al— ad— ^ 



i— ■ — a — 

J— ah-3— 

my guid-ingStar,my guid-ing Star, And hold me by Thy 

guid - ing Star, And hold me by Thy 



I_LJ 1 1 ! 1 1 1 — 

1 V « i— J— 






teP 



k-=- hrH"^ m — is r — 



r 



A * L 



g>— 3-2—= fL -rfP : i R 






£=fr 



^E 



A 
P 

hand,yes,by Thy hand; And when I face the judg - ment 

hand; And when I face the judgment, 



p 



J> J? I J= 



- 1 !- 



-5=1 3 






£=v 



h h h 









t) "-=- 



p r^ 



Eh u ' 

bar, Help me, oh, Lord, to stand. 

judgment bar, Help me, oh, Lord, to stand, to brave-ly stand. 

, — ■ F — •— r 9 H * — . 



*._ . — ■ p •— r « 0- 






INDEX. 



No. 

A Happy Day is Coming: 4 

Almost Persuaded 69 

Amazing- Grace 109 

America 83 

Asleep in Jesus 93 

Be Faithful And Endure 52 

Be Still And Know 41 

Bethany 107 

Blessed Consolation 72 

Blest Be The Tie That Binds 89 

Build On Jesus, The Rock 130 

Closer To My Lord 56 

Come Back Home 110 

Come Into My Heart Lord, Jesus .... 125 

Come Over On The Winning Side 21 

Come, Prince of Peace 42 

Down Memory Lane 126 

Each Day Brings Me Nearer Home 96 

Enough For Me 95 

Fill Me Now 71 

For Heaven I'm Bound In. F. Cover 

Gathering Buds 73 

Give Me Oil In My Lamp 103 

Glory To His Name 63 

God Be With You 33 

God Shall Wipe All Tears Away 49 

God's Message Of Love 113 

Going Home To Be With God 102 

Going Home To Be With Jesus 20 

Goodby 37 

Happy In Him Each Day 23 

Heaven's A Wonderful Place 88 

He Is Our Saviour 26 

Help Me Lord, To Stand 133 

Holy Ghost With Light Divine 79 

How Sweet The Name of Jesus Sounds . . 85 

I Am Glory Bound 127 

I Am Leaving For That New World ... 70 

I Am Traveling On 129 

I Dare Not Walk Alone 131 

I Feel Like Traveling On 39 

I Have The Blessing 31 

I Hear Thy Welcome Voice 75 

I Love Him 10 

I Need The Prayers 61 

I Shall Be At Home With Jesus 53 

I Want My Life To Tell 94 

I Want To Live With Him . 44 

I Will Follow The Lord 80 

I Will Meet You There 9 

I Will Soon Be Going Home 29 

"If" The Bible Is True 76 

I'll Be Singing Over There 40 

I'm A Gettin' Homesick 25 

I'm A Gonna Sail Away 22 

I'm A Pilgrim Down Here 120 

I'm A Trav'lin' 92 

I'm Bound For Heaven 19 

I'm Going Up To Glory 48 

I'm Happy Now 116 

I'm Sailing Along 121 

I'm Traveling Along 98 

I'm Trusting In His Love 119 

I'm Walking In The Narrow Way .... 68 

In Sight Of That Beautiful Home 18 

In The Garden With My Lord 15 

Jesus Is Coming Again 100 

Jesus Is The Light 46 



No. 

Jesus, Saviour, Pilot Me 81 

Just A Little While 115 

Just As I Am 91 

Keep Holding On 17 

Keep My Hand In Thine 55 

Keep Shining On Me 90 

Lead Me Shepherd 51 

Let Him Come In 84 

Let Me Dream of Heaven '. 112 

Let Us Sing And Tell The Story 34 

Living In The Shadow Of The Cross . . 36 

Living In The Sunlight 5 

Look Away To Christ 82 

March With The Captain True 27 

Marching Onward With The King .... 78 

Morning Praise 87 

My Faith Looks Up To Thee 97 

My Home Above 13 

My Home In Glory In. B. Cover 

My Never Failing Friend 24 

My Soul Is O'erflowing With Joy .... 2 

Near The Cross 57 

O Happy Day 38 

Oh, What A Happy Day 54 

On Wings Of Love 86 

Only Trust Him 65 

Over In The Sweet By And By 14 

Over On The Hills Of Glory 108 

Over There 28 

Pray All Your Troubles Away 32 

Rock Of Ages 101 

Shining In Your Soul 3 

Sing A Little Sunshine Song 66 

Smile Your Troubles Away 58 

Softly And Tenderly 43 

Strength For The Battle 30 

Such Wonderful Love 122 

Tell It Everywhere You Go 47 

Tell Out The Story 50 

That Will Be Heaven For Me 6 

The Army Of My Lord 60 

The Eye That's Watching You 64 

The Heavenly Jubilee 114 

The Keeping Of His Love 123 

The Pentecostal Blessing 118 

The Royal Telephone 12 

There Is A Fountain 105 

Thou Thinkest Lord, Of Me 67 

Till Toiling Days Are O'er 16 

Trust In The Lord And Keep Sweet ... 74 

Visions Of Heaven 128 

Walk With Jesus 117 

Walking In The Highway 132 

Walking On The Narrow Trail 7 

We Shall Be Happy Over Yonder 8 

We Shall Rise And Sail Away Home . . Ill 

Well! Glory 106 

We'll Give Him Glory 59 

We'll Never Say Goodby 35 

We'll Wear A Shining Crown 62 

What A Friend We Have In Jesus .... 45 

What A Singing That Will Be 104 

When The Sun Fades Away 11 

When They Call My Name 124 

When We All Get There 1 

When We Look On His Face . . . .Pref. Page 

Where He Leads Me 99 

Whiter Than Snow 77 



James D. Vaughan, Lawrenceburg, Tennessee 



Adger,.M. Pace 

-fe- 



*=tt 



My Home In Glory 



J. B. Troublefield 



^^ff?f g 



1. There's a home of wondrous b«au-ty o -ver on the oth-er shore, And I 

2. That sweet home of love is builded in a Cit - y we are told, With a 

3. It will be- a day of glo -ry when I reach that hap -py home, I shall 

it. $- M. f- f- m M~ 

^jr ^j jczi r^p— P~ P~ P- ' 






V" p— p— tr- r~ p— ^~ 



£=^=1$: 



^ ani 



*=& 



■— " fj" 



P • -*' 

long some day to reach it, when this wea-ry Kfe is o'er; It was built by my Be-| 

wall that's made of jas-per and with streets all piveJ with gold; And when I shall hear my 

live up there with Je-sua nev - er-more from Him to roamj_ Sweet • est praise - efl I'll be 
N *, •-*-*-*--£-■*-&»--!*- -it- 



11} UIIVVV - VDB l/IHUV VU * »• MK 

JL fl^. .«. Jt. .«. .*. 

p P p. 



:p — p— p— b~ p =p: 



rr 



S£ 



jj. h. witntnesauitgor an tne 

ef » — » ■ — ■ ■ J$r -jf. * — mm 



deemer, in a land of end-less day, For His chil-dren who are faithfnl 

Sav-iour say -ing, come with Me a - bide, I shall go to that sweet home and 
sing-ine while the a-ges come and go, TJu-to Je-sus, my Re-deem -er, 

c p— p— p— p— *— h}— P- 11 

a- ges never -more a - gain to roam, I'll be sing-ing of mj Sav-iour 
Fine. Chorus. 



5 — 2 — Hk-4-S — * — I 8 — *— -* — a— F*— 



p - • • p ^ = ^r = 5 : 

all a - long this pilgrim way. In that home, 

live for* ev - er sat- is - fied.In that home be - yondthe riv • er, 

who oocedied His love to show, 

■£■ ; : ■*■ A •#- -k- A -*- -k- A 



lii 






-p-p 

and be 



bleBs-ed 
bless-ed 



^ 



hap-py all the time. 



* 



A 



5=--?-T3 



1 



i 



-r-l. 



3^ 



D.S. 



o* 5 - 



trftTTTT 



£ — t-yi-&— EfgEE 



tr 



Pi 



p P 

home, and the glo-ry bells will chime, 

home, I'll live for ever, will sweetly chime; 






Oa»r>l*kt. IMS. by Junta U. Vicauu. MaaJe Publisher, io •■Honored Guest 



Millions of Vaughan Song Books have 
been sold and are being sold through- 
out America and many other nations. 



j 



TITLES OF BOOKS 



Honored Guest (1945) 
Paradise Garden (1944) 
Boundless Love (1944) 
Sacred Thoughts (1943) 
Gospel Leader (1942) 
Crowning Harmony (1941) 
Heaven's Hallelujahs (1940) 
Gospel Choruses (1939) 
New Temple Bells (1938) 
Harmony Heaven (1935) 
Trumpets Of Jubilee (1929) 
Pleasures Of Heaven (1926) 
Awakening Praises (1923) 



Blissful Showers (1945) 
Dawning Light (1943) 
Crowning Glory (1942) 
Joy Divine (1941) 
Singing Star (1941) 
Beautiful Praise (1940) 
Happy Praises (1939) 
Hallelujah Voices (1937) 
New Gospel Voices (1933) 
Highest Hosannas (1928) 
Millennial Praise (1927) 
Heavenly Praises (1925) 



Praise Divine (1917) 

The above popular books are admirably adapted to the 
needs of the Sunday School and all kinds of religious work. 
They are furnished in shaped notes at uniform prices. The 
price of each book is 35 cents a copy, or $3.60 a dozen, post- 
paid. Please order books by name. 

VAUGHAN'S SPECIAL GOSPEL SONGS 

The last Great book published by the late James D. 
Vaughan. A Gold Mine of Soul-stirring Specials for Church, 
Sunday School, Radio and Revival Services. Scores of good 
solos, duets, trios and quartets. Great for the Choir. Every 
song is a Gem and contains a Gospel Message. Songs that 
bring down, the blessing. Contains 160 pages. Write for com- 
plete index. Shaped notes, only. 

Price 50c a copy; $4.20 a dozen, postpaid. 

GREAT GOSPEL SONGS AND HYMNS 

Great Gospel Songs and Hymns is one of the most com- 
plete church and revival books ever published. It contains 
more than 300 carefully selected songs for all departments of 
the church. Scores of the favorite, nationally known church 
songs, many of the best songs from all southern publishers 
and the greatest number of special songs ever found in one 
book. Write for complete index. 

Shaped notes only. Prices: Limp Binding, 40c a copy; 
$4.00 a dozen. $14.00 per 50; $25.00 per 100. 

Cloth Board, 75c a copy; $6.00 a dozen. $25.00 per 50; 
$45.00 per 100. 

Address all orders to 

JAMES D. VAUGHAN 

MUSIC PUBLISHER 

Lawrenceburg, Tenn.